Interlock Switches Interlock Plugs

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Interlock Switches Interlock Plugs"

Transcription

1 TREICHL-ATM Electronic Auf der Bült 0 - D 89 Mönchengladbach Tel Fax atm@treichl.de internet: es Interlock Plugs HS6B HS6E HS5D HS5E HS5E-K HSC/E HSB/HSB Handle HSL

2 Table of Contents/es Selection Guide Table of Contents es Selection Guide.... Interlock Plugs Selection Guide.... Accessories Selection Guide ISO/IEC Standards and es es HS6B Subminiature es HS6E Subminiature es with Solenoid.... HS5D Miniature es HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid HS5E-K es with Key Accessories HS5 Series Door Handle HS5 Series Sliding HS5 Series Plug HS5 Series Padlock Hasp HS9Z ø/ø3m Padlock Cover es HSL es with Solenoid HSE es with Solenoid (3-circuit) HSB/B es HSC es with Solenoid HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key.... Interlock Plugs HSP Interlock Plug Unit....9 HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock.... HSP Interlock Plug Unit with Plastic Holder Product HS6B Subminiature es Small, three-contact interlock switch es HS5D Miniature es Head removal detection function for safer performance Shape Applicable Standards ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL-listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul-listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) EN ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) Mark Page 8 5

3 es Selection Guide Product HSB es Disconnects circuits when the door is opened. es HSB es Disconnects circuits when the door is opened. Shape Applicable Standards ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) Mark Page Product HS6E Subminiature Interlock Switches with Solenoid es with Solenoid HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid With four poles and solenoid. HS5E-K es with Key New interlock switches that can be locked and unlocked with a key. Shape Applicable Standards ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088 (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (c-ul listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) ISO9, IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized) GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9, IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088 GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized) Mark Page

4 es Selection Guide Product HSL es with Solenoid 3000N locking strength; six contacts in a compact housing. with Solenoid HSE-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Door/key are locked without failure dur ing operation. Removing the key unlocks the door, maintaining the cir cuits disconnected. Shape Applicable Standards ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9, EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) Mark Page 8 9 Product HSC es with Solenoid Locks door during machine operation. The door is unlocked by a solenoid lock-release signal indicating that the machine has stopped completely, and disconnecting the circuit. with Solenoid HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Locks the door/key during machine operation. Removing the key unlocks the door, maintaining the circuits disconnected. Shape Applicable Standards ISO9, EN088, IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) Mark Page 06

5 Interlock Plugs/ Accessories Selection Guide Product Interlock Plugs Box Type with Cable Door Lock Panel Mounting HSP (interlock plug unit) HSP Used to detect the open/close (solenoid interlock plug unit) door status by chaining the Used to detect the open/close guard door. door status by chaining the guard door. Door is locked during operation. HSC-P (door lock interlock plug unit) Removing the plug unlocks the door, maintaining the circuit disconnected. Solenoid type locks the plug during operation. HSP (panel mounting interlock plug) Ideal for using as a portable plug to bring into hazardous areas. Shape Applicable Standards UL98, UL508 (UL Listed), CSA C. No. (c-ul Listed), CSA C. No. 8. Mark Page Product HS5 Series Door Handle HS5 Series Sliding HS5 Series Plug Shape Page Product HS5 Series Padlock Hasp HS9Z ø/ø3m Padlock Cover with Plastic Holder Shape Page

6 ISO / IEC Standards and es ISO / IEC Standards and es ISO Guard and protective devices shall be used to protect persons whenever inherently safe design does not reasonably make it possible either to remove hazards or to sufficiently reduce risks. ISO Selection and implementation of guards and protective devices 5.. General As the need for frequency of access increases this inev itably leads to the fixed guard not being replaced. This requires the use of an alternative protective measure (movable interlocking guard, sensitive protective equipment). ISO 9 (EN 088) 5.7 Design to minimize defeat possibilities Interlocking devices shall be designed and instructions for their installation and maintenance shall be given so that they cannot be defeated in a simple manner. General Plant Environment Locking necessary for production pur poses (not for safety reasons) Sputtering or blow On small equipment with small mounting space On large equipment On small and lightweight door with small mounting space On aluminum frame guard or small equipment with small mounting space General Plant Environment Model / Shape Applicable Standards Marks Page HS6B Thin Plastic ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL-listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul-listed) GB HS5D Miniature Plastic HSB Plastic HSB Rugged Die-cast Aluminum HS6E with Solenoid Interlock HS5E with Solenoid Interlock HS5E-K with Key Interlock HSL with Solenoid Interlock EN ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) ISO9, EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088 (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (c-ul listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) ISO9, IEC , EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved), UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized), GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9, IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized) ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) Note: Can be used as a safety product only when using in combination with safety relay module Continued on the next page 6

7 ISO / IEC Standards and es Continued from the previous page Model / Shape Applicable Standards Marks Page ISO 9 (EN088) 7. Selection of an interlocking device 7. Stopping time and access time An interlocking device with guard locking shall be used when the stopping time is greater than the time (called access time, see 3.9) taken by a person to reach the danger zone. ISO 9 (EN 088) 5 Provisions for the design of interlocking devices 5.5 The part [bolt] intended to lock the guard shall be spring-applied - power-released. General Plant Environment Heavy or large door such as machine tools, which require high locking strength. On small and lightweight door with small mounting space On aluminum frame guard or small equipment with small mounting space Frequent manual unlocking for maintenance and inspection. Hostage control is required on systems such as large system (to ensure operators safety by carrying a key) HS6E Spring Lock (slim plastic) HS5E Spring Lock (Slim plastic) HS5E-K Key Interlock (Slim plastic) HSL with Solenoid Interlock HSE-K with Solenoid Lock (Plastic with high actuator retention force, with hos tage key) ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088 (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (c-ul listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) ISO9, IEC , EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved), UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized), GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9, IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized) ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) ISO9, EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) Possible sputtering or blow Hostage control is required on systems such as large system (to ensure operators safety by carrying a key) HSC with Spring Lock (rugged diecast aluminum) HSC-K with Hostage Key (rugged diecast aluminum) ISO9, EN088, IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) 06 7

8 HS6B Subminiature es World-class compactness with three poles of contacts. World s smallest switch: mm Dual contacts and monitor contacts achieve the highest safety category (ISO 389-, EN 95-) Two actuator entry slots provide flexibility for installation options. Integral cable design minimizes wiring, preventing wiring mis takes. Can be mounted in two directions. Degree of protection (contacts): IP67 (IEC 6059) Housing allows drainage. NC contacts are direct opening action (IEC/EN ). Proprietary actuators prevent unauthorized opening of the con tacts (ISO9, EN088). Vertical/horizontal Angle Adjustable (for hinged door) Right-angle (SUS30) Straight (SUS30) Contact Configuration Cable Length Part No. (Package quantity: ) NC-NO m HS6B-B0 Zb HS6B-B HS6B-B05 NC m HS6B-0B0 Zb HS6B-0B HS6B-0B05 NC-NO Zb m HS6B-B0 HS6B-B HS6B-B05 3NC m HS6B-03B0 Zb HS6B-03B03 3 HS6B-03B05 Contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted. s 3 Description Straight Right-angle Horizontal/vertical Angle Adjustable (for hinged doors) (Note) Part No. (Package quantity: ) HS9Z-A6 HS9Z-A6 HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 Note: Select an actuator that moves in the direction required by the hinged door and interlock switch (see pages 9 and 0). Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V Rated Current (Ith).5A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-).5A.5A AC Rated Inductive Load (AC-5).5A 0.75A Current (Ie) Resistive load (DC-).5A.A 0.55A DC Inductive Load (DC-3).3A 0.55A 0.7A Minimum applicable load (reference): 3V AC/DC, A Approved ratings AC-5 0V/0.75A TÜV DC-3 50V/0.7A DC-3 30V/.3A 0V AC/0.75A Pilot Duty 50V DC/0.7A Pilot Duty UL/c-UL C300 Q300 AC-5 0V/0.75A CCC DC-3 30V/.3A Specifications ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜVapproved) Applicable Standards UL508 (UL-listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul-listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC 600-/ EN 600- (applicable standards for use) 006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive) Applicable Directive 006//EC (Machinery Directive) Operating 5 to +70 C (no freezing) Temperature Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand kv Voltage Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Contact Resistance Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of different poles: 00 MΩ minimum 300 mω maximum (initial value, m cable) 500 mω maximum (initial value, cable) 700 mω maximum (initial value, cable) Electric Shock Protection Class Class II (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Operating extremes: 300 m/s (30G) Damage limits: 000 m/s (00G) Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel 8 mm minimum Direct Opening Force 60N minimum Operating Frequency 00 operations/h Mechanical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-5) 00,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 00 operations/h, Electrical Durability load AC- 50V/.5A, DC- 50V/0.A),000,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 00 operations/h,load V AC/DC, 00mA) Conditional Short-circuit Current Housing Color Cable Weight (approx.) 50A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short- circuit protection.) Black UL6 No. 0 AWG (6-core) 0g (HS6B-***0, cable length m) 70g (HS6B-***03, cable length ) 0g (HS6B-***05, cable length ) 8

9 HS6B HS6B Subminiature es Dimensions 0. R. (58) Mounting Hole Layout 0 to 0. Slot Plug (Note ) (supplied) Note : Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch * 78 (ø7.6) (9) * center position -M Screws (ø.3 or M tapped) The interlock switch can be mounted in two directions. Using the HS9Z-A6 Straight Using the HS9Z-A6 Right-angle Using the HS9Z-A65/A66 Angle Adjustable (.6 ± )* (5) (.) 30.8 (5) ± * ± * 0.8 () (5) () (30. ± )* Stop (Note ) (supplied) ± * Stop (Note ) (supplied) (.) 5. ± * (5) Stop (Note ) (supplied) Dimensions Straight Actuaor (HS9Z-A6) -ø (5.8) Angle Adjustmentable (HS9Z-A65) Horizontal Adjustment Orienting Insert Angle Adjustmentable (HS9Z-A66) The HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66 have the metal key inserted in opposite directions. Horizontal Adjustment Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) When mounted (5). -ø9 Rubber Bushing 0. Right-angle (HS9Z-A6) When mounted (33.8) When mounted (5.6) Stop (supplied) (Note ) Vertical Adjustment 3 Orienting Insert Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) R. (M Holes) 5 Vertical Adjustment 0 Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Stop (supplied) (Note ) 0 Orienting Insert -ø9 When mounted (5) Rubber Bushing ø.3 Stop (supplied) (Note ) 3. 3 The orientation of actuator adjustment (horizontal/vertical) can be changed using the orienting insert (white plastic) installed on the back of the actuator. The base is made of glass-reinforced PA66 (66 nylon). Angle adjustment screws are stainless steel. When using adhesive on screws, take material compatibility into consideration. Note : After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator stop from the interlock switch. Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Mounting Hole Layout Straight/Right-angle -M Screws (ø.3 or M tapped) Angle Adjustable 5 -M Screws (ø.3 or M tapped) 9

10 HS6B Subminiature es Contact Configuration and Operation Chart Model HS6B- HS6B-0 HS6B- HS6B-03 NC-NO NC NC-NO 3NC Contact Configuration Zb Zb Zb Zb inserted completely Contact Operation C art 0.8 ( Mounting Reference Position) (Travel: mm) removed completely : Contact ON (closed) : Contact OFF (open) of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch on hinged doors, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. When using on doors with small minimum radius, use the angle adjustable actuator (HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged doors may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. When using the HS9Z-A6 Right-angle When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: When using the HS9Z-A65/HS9Z-A66 Angle Adjustable When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Horizontal Adjustment HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 50 mm Label Vertical Adjustment HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 50 mm Label 50 mm 50 mm 60 mm 60 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface Horizontal Adjustment 70 mm Vertical Adjustment 70 mm When the door hinged is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A65 Label HS9Z-A65 Label HS9Z-A66 HS9Z-A66 70 mm 70 mm 30 mm 30 mm Angle Adjustment for the HS9Z-A65/HS9Z-A66 Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (see figures on page 9). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can enter properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not become loose. 0

11 HS6B HS6B Subminiature es Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, use only safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform a risk assessment and make a safety circuit which satisfies the requirements of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in the location where a human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a malfunction. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Use proprietary actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. Cover the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Mounting Mount the interlock switch on the machine. Mount the actuator on the hinged door. Note: When mounting an actuator, make sure that the actuator enters into the slot in the correct direction, as shown on the right. Recommended Screw Tightening Torque Interlock switch (M screw):.0 to.5 N m (M screw):.0 to.5 N m Mounting bolts are not supplied, and must be purchased separately by the user. Note: The above recommended tightening torque of the mounting screw is the value with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. Cable Do not fasten or loosen the gland at the bottom of the interlock switch. When bending cable during wiring, make sure that the cable radius is kept at 0 mm minimum. When wiring, make sure that water or oil does not enter from the end of cable. Gland Minimum Radius 0 mm (00) Wire Identification Wires can be identified by color and/or a white line printed on the wire. No. Insulation Color No. Insulation Color Orange/White Brown Blue/White 5 Blue 3 Brown/White 6 Orange Colored Insulation Jacket Dummy Insulation (black) Terminal Number Identification When wiring, the terminal number on each contact can be identified by wire color. The following diagrams show a safety (main) contact and one or two auxiliary contacts for two-contact and threecontact types. Blue Orange 33 Blue Brown Orange 33 NC-NO Zb NC-NO Zb Blue/White 3 Orange/White Blue/White Brown/White 3 Orange/White Blue Orange 3 Blue Brown Orange 3 NC Zb 3NC Zb Blue/White 3 Orange/White Blue/White Brown/White 3 Orange/White When wiring, cut any dummy insulation (black) and any unused wires at the end of the jacket to avoid incorrect wiring.

12 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Small interlock switch with five poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in tight spaces. Horizontal/Vertical Angle Adjustable s Compact body: mm 5-mm-wide, thinnest solenoid interlock switch in the world. Reversible mounting and angled cable allow four actuator insertion directions. Energy saving. V DC, 0 ma (solenoid: 00 ma, LED: 0 ma). Can be driven directly by a controller. Manual unlocking possible on three sides. LED indicator shows solenoid operation Straight Right-angle (SUS30) Spring Lock (SUS30) Automatically locks the actuator without power applied to the solenoid. After the machine stops, unlocking is completed by the solenoid. Manual unlocking is possible on three sides in the event of power fail ure or maintenance. Solenoid Lock The actuator is locked when energized. The actuator is unlocked when de-energized. Flexible locking function can be achieved, for an application where locking is not required and sudden stopping of a machine must be prevented. Ratings Contact Ratings 300V (door monitor contact) 50V (lock monitor contact) Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) (Note ) 30V (between LED or solenoid and ground) Operating temperature 5 to 35 C.5A (up to circuits).0a (3 or more circuits) Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Operating temperature 35 to 50 C.0A ( circuit) 0.5A ( or more circuits) Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Rated Current (Ie) Main & Lock Monitor s Door Monitor AC Resistive load (AC-) A Inductive Load (AC-5) A DC Resistive load (DC-) A 0.A Inductive Load (DC-3) A 0.A AC Resistive load (AC-).5A.5A Inductive Load (AC-5).5A 0.75A DC Resistive load (DC-).5A.A 0.55A Inductive Load (DC-3).3A 0.55A 0.7A Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma Approved ratings Door Monitor Contact Lock Monitor Contact TÜV UL/c-UL CCC AC-5 0V/0.75A DC-3 50V/0.7A DC-3 30V/.3A AC-5 5V/A DC-3 5V/0.A DC-3 30V/A Solenoid/Indicator 0V AC/0.75A Pilot Duty 50V DC/0.7A Pilot Duty C300 Q300 5V AC/A Pilot Duty 5V DC/0.A Pilot Duty DC-3 30V/A Pilot Duty AC-5 0V/0.75A DC-3 30V/.3A AC-5 5V/A DC-3 30V/A Locking Mechanism Spring Lock Solenoid Lock Rated Voltage V DC (00% duty cycle) Rated Current 0 ma (solenoid 00 ma, LED 0 ma) (initial value) Coil Resistance 0Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 85% maximum (at 0 C) Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Rated voltage 0% Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Continuous Insulation Class Class F Light Source LED Illumination Color Green Solenoid Indicator Specifications ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088 (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (c-ul listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) IEC 600-/EN 600- (applicable standards for use) Operating 5 to +50 C (no freezing) Temperature Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand Voltage Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Contact Resistance Main & lock monitor circuits:.5 KV Door monitor circuit:.5 kv Between solenoid/led and ground: 0.5 kv Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of different poles: 00 MΩ minimum 300 mω maximum (initial value, m cable) 500 mω maximum (initial value, cable) 700 mω maximum (initial value, cable) Electric Shock Protection Class II (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Operating extremes: 00 m/s (0G) Damage limits: 000 m/s (00G) Vibration Resistance Operating extremes: 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel 8.0 mm minimum Direct Opening Force 60N minimum Retention Force 500N minimum (GS-ET-9) Operating Frequency 900 operations/h Mechanical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) 00,000 operations minimum (rated load) Electrical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (V AC/DC, 00 ma) (operating frequency 900 operations/h) Conditional Short-circuit Current Cable Cable Diameter Weight (approx.) 50A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection.) UL6, No. AWG (-core: 0.3 mm or equivalent/core) ø7.6 mm 0g (m cable) 0g ( cable) 600g ( cable)

13 HS6E Standard HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Lock Mechanism Number Contact Configuration Cable Length Part No. L (When inserted) (When ON) (+) ( ) A A Main : NC+NC, Door NC Lock NO Main : m HS6E-LB0-G HS6E-LB03-G HS6E-LB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC Lock NC m HS6E-MB0-G Spring Lock M Main : HS6E-MB03-G HS6E-MB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Lock NO m HS6E-NB0-G N Main : HS6E-NB03-G HS6E-NB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Lock NC m HS6E-PB0-G P Main : HS6E-PB03-G HS6E-PB05-G L (When inserted) (When ON) (+) ( ) A A Main : NC+NC, Door NC Lock NO Main : m HS6E-L7YB0-G HS6E-L7YB03-G HS6E-L7YB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC Lock monitor : NC m HS6E-M7YB0-G Solenoid Lock M Main : HS6E-M7YB03-G HS6E-M7YB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Lock NO m HS6E-N7YB0-G N Main : HS6E-N7YB03-G HS6E-N7YB05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Lock NC m HS6E-P7YB0-G P Main : HS6E-P7YB03-G HS6E-P7YB05-G The contact configurations show the contact status when the actuator is inserted and locked. LED color is G (green) only. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. 3

14 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid 5-circuit Independent Output Lock Mechanism Number Contact Configuration Cable Length Part No. VL Door Monitor (When inserted) Lock Monitor (When solenoid is OFF) Door monitor circuit: 3NC Lock monitor circuit: NC, NO Door monitor circuit:3nc Lock monitor circuit: NC m m HS6E-VLB0-G HS6E-VLB03-G HS6E-VLB05-G HS6E-VMB0-G Spring Lock VM Door monitor circuit: NC, NO Lock monitor circuit: NC, NO m HS6E-VMB03-G HS6E-VMB05-G HS6E-VNB0-G VN HS6E-VNB03-G HS6E-VNB05-G Door monitor circuit: NC, NO Lock monitor circuit: NC m HS6E-VPB0-G VP HS6E-VPB03-G HS6E-VPB05-G VL Door monitor (When inserted) Lock monitor (When solenoid is off) Door monitor circuit: 3NC Lock monitor circuit: NC, NO m HS6E-VL7YB0-G HS6E-VL7YB03-G HS6E-VL7YB05-G Door monitor circuit: 3NC Lock monitor circuit: NC m HS6E-VM7YB0-G Solenoid Lock VM Door monitor circuit: NC, NO Lock monitor circuit: NC, NO m HS6E-VM7YB03-G HS6E-VM7YB05-G HS6E-VN7YB0-G VN HS6E-VN7YB03-G HS6E-VN7YB05-G Door monitor circuit: NC, NO Lock monitor circuit: NC m HS6E-VP7YB0-G VP HS6E-VP7YB03-G HS6E-VP7YB05-G The contact configurations show the contact status when the actuator is inserted and locked. LED color is G (green) only. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately.

15 HS6E HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Straight Shape Part No. Remarks HS9Z-A6 The retention force of HS9Z-A6 actuator is 500N maximum. Do no apply excessive load, otherwise the actuator may fall off the door. Right-angle Right-angle with Mounting Plate HS9Z-A6 HS9Z-A6S The retention force of HS9Z-A6 actuator is 00N maximum. Do no apply excessive load, otherwise the actuator may fall off the door. When retention force of 00N or more is required, use the HS9Z- A6S actuator. The retention force of HS9Z-A6S actuator is 500N maximum. Do no apply excessive load, otherwise the actuator may fall off the door. Horizontal/Vertical Angle Adjustable Horizontal/Vertical Angle Adjustable HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 The HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66 have the metal key installed in opposite directions. Select actuator by determining the required moving direction in consideration of the door and interlock switch. See pages 7,, and 3. The retention force of HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66 actuators is 500N maximum. Part No. Development H S 6 E - L B 05 - G Code Main Door Monitor Lock Monitor L: NC+NC NC NO M: NC+NC NC NC N: NC+NC NC, NO NO P: NC+NC NC, NO NC VL: 3NC NC, NO VM: 3NC NC VN: NC, NO NC, NO VP: NC, NO NC Solenoid Unit Voltage/Lock Mechanism : V DC/Spring Lock 7Y: V DC/Solenoid Lock Indicator Color G: green Cable Length 0: m 03: 05: Housing Color B: Black Indicator Voltage : V DC 5

16 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Dimensions Mounting Hole Layout * Hole for Manual Unlocking ø (reference) 3-M Screw (ø.3 or M tapped hole) ø (.5) (.5) Use three mounting screws to install the interlock switch. The switch cannot be installed properly using only one or two screws, resulting in possible malfunction (.3) C R. Manual Unlocking Key.8 0 to 3-M Screw Hole for Manual Unlocking (ø.3 or M tapped hole) ø (reference) * center to.8 When using straight actuator (HS9Z-A6) (.6 ± )* (5) () When using right-angle actuator (HS9Z-A6S).6 ±*.6 ±* () (6.) When using horizontal/vertical angle adjustable actuator (HS9Z-A65/A66) (5) () (Note) Stop (supplied) (Note) Stop (supplied) (Note) Stop (supplied) (Note) Note : Remove the actuator stop after mounting the actuator. Note :. when using HS9Z-A6. * The retention force of the HS9Z-A6 actuator is 00N. When tensile force exceeding 00N is expected, use the HS9Z-A6S actuator (with a mounting plate). Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure on the right, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is: The actuator stop on the actuator lightly touches the interlock switch. Note: After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator stop from the actuator. Stop Door Stop 0.8 Door Stop HS9Z-A6 6

17 HS6E HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Dimensions Straight (HS9Z-A6) When mounted (5) -ø.3 -ø Rubber Bushing (5.8) Note Stop (supplied) Right-angle (HS9Z-A6) The retention force of the HS9Z-A6 actuator is 00N. When tensile force exceeding 00N is expected, use the HS9Z-A6S actuator. When mounted (33.8) When mounted (5.6) 0.8 ø-9 When mounted (5). 8. Rubber Bushing 3.5 -ø Right-angle with Mounting Plate (HS9Z-A6S) Note: See page 3 for actuator installation. When mounted (6.) -ø9 Rubber Bushing When mounted (33.8) When mounted (0.) When mounted (6.) Mounting Plate (supplied) 3.5 -ø. 3.. (Note) Stop (supplied) (Note) Stop (supplied) Note: The actuator stop is used to adjust the actuator position. Remove the actuator stop after the actuator is mounted. Angle Adjustable (HS9Z-A65) Horizontal Adjustment Orienting Insert Angle Adjustable (HS9Z-A66) The HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66 have the metal key inserted in opposite directions. Horizontal Adjustment Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Adjustment Orientation The orientation of actuator adjustment (horizontal/vertical) can be changed using the orienting insert (white plastic) installed on the back of the actuator. Orienting Insert 0 0 Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Orienting Insert 3 Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Vertical Adjustment Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) (Note ) Stop (Supplied) (Note) Stop (supplied) Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) R. (M Holes) Note: The base is made of glass-reinforced PA66 (66 nylon). Angle adjustment screws are stainless steel. When using adhesive on screws, take material compatibility into consideration. 5 0 Mounting Hole Layout (horizontal/vertical swing) 5 -M Screw (ø.3 or M tapping screw) Accessory Description Manual Unlock Key (long) Part No. HS9Z-T3 Manual Unlock Key (supplied) (plastic) Manual Unlock Key (long) (metal) () 5 9 ø ø0 3 8 (.5) All dimensions in mm. 7

18 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Standard Spring Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Unlocking using Manual Unlock Key Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Status UNLOCK Diagram (Example: HS6E-N) (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A LOCK Manually Unlocked Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HS6E-L (When inserted) (When ON) Door Lock Monitor Monitor (+) ( ) A A Main : HS6E-M Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Model and Diagram Main : HS6E-N Main : Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) HS6E-P Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main : Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending the interlock signals of the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends the monitoring signals of open/closed and lock/unlocked statuses of the protective door. Operation Characteristics (reference) Main Door Monitor (door open, NO) Door Monitor (door closed, NC) Lock Monitor (unlocked, NO) Lock Monitor (locked, NC) ( Insertion Position).9 (Locked Position) (stroke in mm) : Contacts ON (closed) : Contacts OFF (open) The characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A6, -A6, -A65, and -A66 actuators. For the HS9Z-A6S actuator, subtract 0.6 mm. The characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters an entry slot of an interlock switch. 8

19 HS6E HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Standard Solenoid Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Unlocking using Manual Unlock Key Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Status UNLOCK LOCK Manually Unlocked Diagram (Example: HS6E-N7Y) (+) A ( ) A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HS6E-L7Y Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) (When inserted) (When ON) Door Lock Door Monitor Monitor Monitor (door closed) - ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) (+) ( ) A A Door Monitor Main : (door closed) 3-3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) HS6E-M7Y Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 (+) A ( ) A OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Model and Diagram Main : HS6E-N7Y Main : Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) HS6E-P7Y Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main - ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main : Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) (Note ) OFF (de-energized) to ON (re-energized) (Note ) (Note ) Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending the interlock signals of the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends the monitoring signals of open/closed and lock/unlocked statuses of the protective door. Note : Do not attempt manual unlocking while the solenoid is energized. Note : Do not energize the solenoid for a long period of time while the door is open or while the door is unlocked manually using the manual unlock key. Operation Characteristics (reference) Main Door Monitor (door open, NO) Door Monitor (door closed, NC) Lock Monitor (unlocked, NO) Lock Monitor (locked, NC) ( Insertion Position).9 (Locked Position) (stroke in mm) : Contacts ON (closed) : Contacts OFF (open) The characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A6, -A6, -A65, and -A66 actuators. For the HS9Z-A6S actuator, subtract 0.6 mm. The characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters an entry slot of an interlock switch. 9

20 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid 5-circuit Independent Output Spring Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid deenergized Unlocking using Manual Unlock Key Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid deenergized Door Status Manually unlocked (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Diagram (Example: HS6E-VN) Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HS6E-VL Door Monitor (door closed) - Model and Contact Configuration HS6E-VM HS6E-VN HS6E-VP Door monitor Lock monitor (When inserted) (When off) (+) ( ) A A Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 Solenoid Power A-A (all model) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) Monitor circuit: Sends the monitoring signals of open/closed and lock/unlocked statuses of the protective door. Operation Characteristics (reference) ( Insertion Position).9 (Locked Position) (stroke in mm) Door Monitor (door open, NO) : Contacts ON (closed) Door Monitor (door closed, NC) Lock Monitor (unlocked, NO) : Contacts OFF (open) Lock Monitor (locked, NC) The characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A6, -A6, -A65, and -A66 actuators. For the HS9Z-A6S actuator, subtract 0.6 mm. The characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters an entry slot of an interlock switch. 0

21 HS6E HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid 5-circuit Independent Output Solenoid Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid deenergized Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid deenergized Door open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized When using Manual Unlock Key Door closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized energized Doot Status Manually unlocked (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Diagram (Example: HS6E-VN7Y) Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HS6E-VL7Y Door Monitor (door closed) - Model and Contact Configuration HS6E-VM7Y HS6E-VN7Y Door Monitor (When inserted) HS6E-VP7Y (+) ( ) A A Lock Monitor When ON Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) 3-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door closed) - Door Monitor (door open) 33-3 Lock Monitor (locked) - Lock Monitor (locked) 5-5 Solenoid Power A-A (all model) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) (Note ) (Note ) (Note ) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) Monitor circuit: Sends the monitoring signals of open/closed and lock/unlocked statuses of the protective door. Note : Do not attempt manual unlocking while the solenoid is energized. Note : Do not energize the solenoid for a long period of time while the door is open or while the door is unlocked manually using the manual unlock key. Operation Characteristics (reference) ( Insertion Position).9 (Locked Position) (stroke in mm) Door Monitor (door open, NO) : Contacts ON (closed) Door Monitor (door closed, NC) Lock Monitor (unlocked, NO) : Contacts OFF (open) Lock Monitor (locked, NC) The characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A6, -A6, -A65, and -A66 actuators. For the HS9Z-A6S actuator, subtract 0.6 mm. The characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters an entry slot of an interlock switch.

22 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, use only safety relays, since welded or stick ing contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform a risk assessment and make a safety circuit which satisfies the requirements of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in a location where a human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Solenoid lock is locked when energized, and unlocked when de-energized. When energization is interrupted due to wire disconnection or other failures, the interlock switch may be unlocked causing possible danger to the operators. Solenoid lock must not be used in applications where locking is strictly required for safety. Perform a risk assessment and determine whether solenoid lock is appro priate. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. When unlocking, the switch may not be unlocked if a load is applied to the actuator. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a malfunction. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere, or in an area subjected to direct sunlight. Use dedicated actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. For correct operation, install the interlock switch on a flat surface and provide sufficient strength to the surface so that it is not disfigured. Do not insert any object between the interlock switch and installation surface. Do not cut the actuator. modification of the actuator may cause damage. The locking strength is rated at 500N. Do not apply a load higher than the rated value. When a higher load is expected, provide an additional system consisting of another interlock switch without lock (such as the HS6B/HS7A interlock switch) or a sensor to detect door opening and stop the machine. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. While the solenoid is energized, the switch temperature rises approximately 35 C above the ambient temperature (to approximately 85 C while the ambient temperature is 50 C). Do not touch to prevent burns. If cables come into contact with the switch, use heat-resistant cables. Solenoid has polarity. Be sure of correct polarity when wiring, otherwise solenoid will be damaged. Do not apply voltage over the rated voltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. Bouncing will occur on the lock monitor contact during locking and unlocking (reference value: 0 ms). Although the HS9Z-A6/A6/A6S actuators alleviate shock when the actuator enters a slot in the interlock switch, make sure that excessive shock is not applied. If the rubber bushings become deformed or cracked, replace with new ones. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch on hinged doors, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. When using on doors with small minimum radius, use the angle adjustable actuator (HS9Z-A65 and HS9Z-A66). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged doors may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. When Using the HS9Z-A6/A6S Right-angle When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 60 mm 60 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 30 mm 30 mm

23 HS6E HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid When using the HS9Z-A65/HS9Z-A66 Angle Adjustable When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 Minimum Radius 50 mm 50 mm HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 Minimum Radius 50 mm 50 mm Label When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 Minimum Radius 70 mm dius 70 mm Minimum Radius HS9Z-A65 HS9Z-A66 Minimum Radius 70mm 70mm Label Angle Adjustment for the HS9Z-A65/HS9Z-A66 Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (see figures on page 7). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can enter properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not become loose. Mounting Examples Mount the interlock switch on a fixated machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both interlock switch and actuator on hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Application on Sliding Doors dius Minimum Radius Application on Hinged Doors For Manual Unlocking Spring lock The HS6E allows manual unlocking of the actuator to pre-check proper door operation before wiring or turning power on, as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Solenoid lock The HS6E can be unlocked manually in emergency. When using the manual unlock key Manual Unlocking (installed on both sides) UNLOCK LOCK Normal Position When locking or unlocking the interlock switch manually, turn the key fully using the manual unlock key supplied with the switch. Using the interlock switch with the key not fully turned (less than 90 ) may cause damage to the interlock switch or operation failures (when manually unlocked, the switch will keep the main circuit disconnected and the door unlocked). Do not apply excessive force (0.5 N m or more) to the manual unlock part, otherwise the manual unlock part will become damaged. Do not leave the manual unlock key attached to the switch during operation. This is dangerous because the switch can always be unlocked while the machine is in operation. Manual Unlock Key (supplied with the interlock switch) Manual Unlocking Position When unlocking pushing the plate inside the interlock switch Remove the screw at the side of the interlock switch (the same side where actuator is inserted) and insert a small screwdriver. Push the plate inside the interlock switch toward the LED indicator using the screwdriver until the actuator is unlocked. Tighten the screw to a proper torque (0.3 to 0.5 N m). Do not tighten with excessive force, otherwise the interlock switch will be damaged. Be sure to reinstall the screw, otherwise the waterproof capability will be lost. Door HS9Z-A6S HS9Z-A6 HS6E Latch Door Stop Note: When mounting an actuator, make sure that the actuator enters the slot in the correct direction, as shown on the right. Screwdriver Caution Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of the interlock switch with solenoid is lost. While the solenoid is energized, do not unlock the switch manually (solenoid lock). 3

24 HS6E Subminiture es with Solenoid Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock switch:.0 to.5 N m (three M screws) s:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. Mounting bolts are not supplied with the interlock and must be supplied by the user. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator are installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws, rivets, or welding the screws. When installing the HS9Z-A6S actuator, use the mounting plate (supplied with the actuator) on the hinged door, and secure the actuator tightly using two M screws. The mounting plate has orientation. Do not lose the mounting plate. M Screws Mounting Plate (supplied) Rubber Bushing Wire Identification Wires can be identified by the color and or a white line printed on the wire. No. Insulation Color No. Insulation Color Blue/White 7 White Gray 8 Black 3 Pink 9 Pink/White Orange 0 Brown/White 5 Orange/White Brown 6 Gray/White Blue Note: Wires of gray or gray/white are not used and should not be connected. Colored Insulation Jacket Terminal Number Identification When wiring, identify the terminal number of each contact by the color of insulation. The following table shows the identification of terminal numbers. When wiring, cut unused wires at the end of the jacket to avoid incorrect wiring. Mo el ontact Arrange ent Door Monitor Lock Monitor Cables Hinged Door M Tapped Hole Do not fasten or loosen the gland at the bottom of the interlock switch. When bending the cable during wiring, make sure that the cable radius is kept at 30 mm minimum. When wiring, make sure that water or oil does not enter from the end of the cable. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Otherwise the interlock switch will be damaged. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. HS6E-L HS6E-M HS6E-N HS6E-P Main circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Main circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Main circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Main circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange (+) ( ) White A A Black Blue/White Brown/White Pink 53 5 Pink/White 3 3 Orange/White 3 Blue/White Brown/White Pink 5 5 Pink/White 3 Orange/White Brown/White Pink Orange/White Blue/White Pink/White Blue/White Brown/White Pink 5 5 Pink/White 33 3 Orange/White HS6E-VL Monitor circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Monitor circuit: Blue/White Gray Brown/White 3 3 Orange/White Pink 53 5 Gray/White Pink/White HS6E-VM Monitor circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Blue/White Gray Brown/White 3 3 Orange/White Gray/White Gland 30 mm (70) HS6E-VN Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Monitor circuit: Pink 5 5 Blue/White Gray Brown/White 33 3 Orange/White Pink 53 5 Pink/White Gray/White Pink/White Gland Minimum Radius 30 mm (50) HS6E-VP Monitor circuit: Blue Monitor circuit: Brown Monitor circuit: Orange Monitor circuit: Blue/White Gray Gray/White Brown/White 33 3 Orange/White Pink 5 5 Pink/White Note: The contact arrangements show the contact status when the actuator is inserted and locked.

25 HS5D Miniature es Head removal detection for safer performance. Head removal detection function turns OFF the main circuit (-) when the head of the HS5D is removed. The HS5D is the same size as contact interlock switches (HS5B). 3 contact with dual enabling contacts and a monitor contact are available. Can be installed in narrow spaces. (30W 30D 9H mm) The actuator is interchangeable with HS5B and HS5E. Double insulation structure eliminates the need for grounding. The head orientation can be rotated, allowing 8 different actuator entries. Degree of protection (contacts): IP67 (IEC6059) NC contacts with direct opening action (IEC/EN ) Proprietary actuators prevent invalidation of the contacts (ISO9, EN088). M3 terminal screws for easy wiring. Gold-plated contacts suitable for small loads. HS5D Specifications EN ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC600-/EN600- (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature 30 to +70 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand kv Voltage Contact Resistance 50 mω maximum (initial value) Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of different poles: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Protection Class Class II (IEC60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel 0 mm minimum Direct Opening Force 50N minimum Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Mechanical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-5) 00,000 operations minimum (AC- 50V, 6A) Electrical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (V AC/DC,00 ma) (operation frequency: 900 operations per hour) Performance of Terminals - of Removed Head Unit Mechanical damage limits: 0 operations min. Insulation resistance: 00 MΩ (initial value) Dielectric strength: 000V, minute (initial value) Conditional Short-circuit Current 00A (50V) (note) Weight (approx.) Plastic head: 80g Metal head: 0g Note: Use a 50V/0A fast-blow fuse as a short-circuit protector. Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V Thermal Current (Ith) 0A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-) 0A 0A 6A Rated AC Inductive Load (AC-5) 0A 5A 3A Current (Ie) * Resistive load (DC-) 8A.A.A DC Inductive Load (DC-3) A.A 0.6A Minimum applicable load (reference): 5V AC/DC, ma (Applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types.) *TÜV rating: AC-5 3A/50V, DC-3 A/30V Part No. Development Code : NO-NC 0: NC : NO-NC 03: 3NC Head Material blank: Plastic Z : Metal Parts Description HS5D- Z RN M Right-angle (SUS30) Angle Adjustable (for hinged doors) Straight w/rubber bushing Gland Port (Use conduits or cable glands which can maintain IP67 protection.) Gland Port blank: G/ P: PG3.5 M: M0 Head/Housing Color RN: Red/Gray M3 Terminal Screw Straight (SUS30) Right-angle w/rubber bushing 5

26 HS5D Miniature es Miniature Safety Package Quantity: NC-NO NC-NO NC-NO 3NC Contact Configuration Main Monitor Main Monitor Main Main Monitor Main Main Monitor Zb 3 Zb 3 Zb 33 3 Zb 3 3 Gland Port Size Part No. Plastic Head Metal Head G/ HS5D-RN HS5D-ZRN PG3.5 HS5D-RNP HS5D-ZRNP M0 HS5D-RNM HS5D-ZRNM G/ HS5D-0RN HS5D-0ZRN PG3.5 HS5D-0RNP HS5D-0ZRNP M0 HS5D-0RNM HS5D-0ZRNM G/ HS5D-0RN HS5D-0ZRN PG3.5 HS5D-0RNP HS5D-0ZRNP M0 HS5D-0RNM HS5D-0ZRNM G/ HS5D-03RN HS5D-03ZRN PG3.5 HS5D-03RNP HS5D-03ZRNP M0 HS5D-03RNM HS5D-03ZRNM Package Quantity: Name Part No. Straight HS9Z-A5 Straight w/rubber bushings HS9Z-A5A Right-angle HS9Z-A5 Right-angle w/rubber bushings HS9Z-A5A Angle Adjustable (vertical/horizontal) HS9Z-A55 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Terminal (3) Terminal Terminal () Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal 3 (33) Terminal Terminal 3 (3) Head Removal Detection Function All HS5D models are equipped with Head Removal Detection Function. When the head is removed, such as when the head is rotated, the main circuit (-) turns OFF. HS5D- (example) When the actuator is removed or inserted, the operation of the main circuits (-, -) are the same. However, when the head is removed, disparity is detected (-: OFF, -: ON). The disparity of the contacts detects the removal of the head. Head removal detection function Main circuit (-) is removed is inserted Head is removed HS5D- When actuator is removed When actuator is inserted When head is removed Main circuit (NC) OFF ON OFF Main circuit (NC) OFF ON ON Note: Head removal detection function is not a direct opening action mechanism. Disparity Existing es When actuator is removed When actuator is inserted When head is removed Main circuit (NC) 3 OFF ON ON Monitor circuit (NC) OFF ON ON 6

27 HS5D HS5D Miniature es Dimensions and Mounting Hole Layouts HS5D- ZRN (Metal Head) With HS9Z-A5 Straight RP: Reference mounting position Metal Head Cover RP (silver) Plastic (red) R. Plastic (gray) Gland Port RP Metal Head Cover Plastic (silver) (RedI R. Plastic (gray) Gland Port 8 0 Slot Plug (supplied) (Note) Stop 6 ± * 7 9. * * 9 Stop 6 ± * 0 to -M Screws Mounting Hole Layout With HS9Z-A5 Right-angle Metal Head Cover Plastic Plastic (gray) RP (silver) (red) Gland Port R. RP 7.7 Metal Head Cover (silver) Plastic (red) R. Plastic Head (gray) Gland Port 0 30 Cover Stop Slot Plug (supplied) (Note) * ± * * 0 to -M Screws 30 Cover Stop Mounting Hole Layout ± * All dimensions in mm. HS5D- RN (Plastic Head) With HS9Z-A5 Straight RP Plastic Head (red). 5. R. Plastic Head (gray) Gland Port RP Plastic Head (red) R. Plastic Head (gray) Gland Port Plastic Head (red) RP R. Plastic Head (gray) Gland Port 35.3 RP 7.7 Plastic Head (red) R. Plastic (gray) Gland Port * * Stop 0 to -M Screws Stop ± * ± * 5 30 Mounting Hole Layout 30 5 With HS9Z-A5 Right-angle 0 30 Cover Stop Slot Plug (supplied) (Note) * ± * * 0 to -M Screws 30 Cover Stop Mounting Hole Layout ± * Note: Plug the unused actuator insertion slot using the slot plug supplied with the safety interlock switch. All dimensions in mm. 7

28 HS5D Miniature es Dimensions Straight (HS9Z-A5) Right-angle (HS9Z-A5) Straight w/rubber bushing (HS9Z-A5A) (6) ø.3 Right-angle w/rubber bushing (HS9Z-A5A) (.) (39.7) R Stop (Note) Stop (Note) -ø (0) -ø0 5 Stop (Note) Washer (supplied with the actuator) (5) 30 Rubber Bushing A Washer (supplied with the actuator) (0) -ø Mounting Hole Layout (Straight, Right-angle) -M Screw Horizontal Swing 3 Orienting Insert 0 Angle Adjustable (HS9Z-A55) 0º Cover Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Stop (Note) (5) -ø9 Rubber Bushing ø9 -ø0 B Stop (Note) *The mounting center distance is set to mm at factory. When 0- mm distance is required, adjust the distance by moving the rubber bushings. A B : The actuator has flexibility to the directions indicated by the arrows. When 0-mm distance is selected, the actuator swings vertically. Mounting Hole Layout (Straight w/rubber bushing) (Right-angle w/rubber bushing) -M Screw Vertical Swing Orienting Insert Stop (Note) 0.8 0º 3.6 R. (M Holes) Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) *Mounting centers can be widened to 0 mm by moving the rubber cushions. Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure below, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is where the actuator stop placed on the actuator lightly touches the interlock switch. Note: After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator stop from the actuator. Door Stop Stop Stop Mounting Hole Layout (horizontal/vertical swing) -M Screw 38 Note: The actuator stop is supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator stop after the actuator position is determined. Contact Configuration and Operation Chart Stop HS9Z-A5 Model Contact Configuration Contact Operation Chart (reference) HS5D-* HS5D-0* HS5D-* HS5D-03* Main - Monitor 3 3- Main - Main - Main - Main - Monitor Main - Main - Monitor ( Mounting Reference Position) Approx. Approx inserted completely Door Stop Cover HS9Z-A5 HS9Z-A55 Orientation (Angle Adjustable) The angle of actuator swing can be changed using the orienting insert (white plastic) installed on the back of the actuator. Do not lose the orienting insert, otherwise the actuator will not operate properly. Approx. 6. (Travel: mm) : Contact ON (closed) : Contact OFF (open) removed completely The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are for the HS9Z-A5. For other actuator types, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch. 8

29 HS5D HS5D Miniature es Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn the power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, use only safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform risk assessment and make up a safety circuit which satisfies the requirements of the safety category. For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements. Tighten the terminal screws to a recommended torque of 0.6 to 0.8 N m. Improper soldering or failure to tighten the terminal screw may cause overheating and fire. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not install the actuator in the location where a human body may come in contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Loosening the screws may cause damage to the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use proprietary actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Safety function of the door interlock switch will be lost if a spare key is inserted into the interlock switch. Make sure that a spare key is not used on the interlock switch. Ensure that the actuator is firmly fastened to the door (by welding, rivet, or special screws) in the appropriate location, so that the actuator cannot be removed. Do not cut the actuator. Modification of the actuator may cause damage. Mounting Examples Installing the Head Do not use the plastic and metal head of the HS5B interlock switches and metal head of the HS5E interlock switch on the HS5D. When using these HS5D and HS5E interlock switches adjacently, ensure that the heads are not interchanged. HS5D HS5E HS5B Plastic Head Metal Head Metal Head Metal Head Metal Metal (gray) Plastic (red) (silver color) (red) (black) Plastic Head Plastic (black or gray) of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A55). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. When using the HS9Z-A5 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Application on Sliding Doors Door HS9Z-A5 HS5D Interlock Switch Door Stop Minimum Radius 70 mm Minimum Radius 90 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Application on Hinged Doors 30 mm 60 mm HS9Z-A5 Door When using the HS9Z-A55 Angle Adjustable When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Horizontal Swing Vertical Swing HS9Z-SH5 Sliding HS5D Interlock Switch 50 mm 50 mm 9

30 HS5D Miniature es When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Horizontal Swing 70 mm Vertical Swing 50 mm Angle Adjustment for the HS9Z-A55 Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (see figures on page 8). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not loosen. Rotating the Head The head of the HS5D can be rotated by removing the four screws from the corners of the HS5D head and reinstalling the head in the desired orientation. When reinstalling the head, make sure that no foreign object enters the interlock switch. Tighten the screws tightly, because loose tightening may cause malfunction. Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.9 to. N m Factory Setting Alternative Head Orientations The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. Mounting bolts must be provided by the user. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator be installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws or welding the screws. Applicable Crimping Terminal When using crimping terminals, be sure to install insulation tubes on the crimping terminals to prevent electric shocks. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. A 7.max. ø3.. to 5.8 Recommended manufacturer: JST Part No.: N0.5-3 Applicable wire size (with insulation tube): 0. to 0.5 mm Note: Do not remove screw A during wiring. Removing the screw may cause malfunction or damage. Applicable Wire Size 0.5 to.5 mm Applicable Cable Glands Use a cable gland with a degree of protection IP max. G/, PG3.5, M0 30 max. 9 max. Head Removal Detection Function Only the NC contact of the main circuit (-) turns OFF (open) when the head is removed, such as when rotating the head. Because NC contacts of other than the main circuit (-) turn ON (closed), be sure to connect the main circuit (-) to the safety circuit. Recommended Tightening Torque Mounting Screw:.8 ±. N m (two M screws) Housing Lid Screw: 0. to 0. N m (M3 screw) Terminal Screw: 0.6 to 0.8 N m (M3 screw) Connector:.7 to 3.3 N m s HS9Z-A5:.8 ±. N m (two M screws) HS9Z-A5: 0.8 ±. N m (two M Phillips screws) HS9Z-A5A/A5A:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) HS9Z-A55:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (made by Nihon Flex) Gland Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) PG3.5 RBC-03PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) M0 RLC-03EC0 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Gland Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ SCS-0* (Seiwa Electric) ALS-6** (Nihon Flex) PG3.5 ST3.5 (LAPP) ABS-**PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) M0 ST-M0X.5 (LAPP) ALS-**EC0 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath diameter. When using a /-NPT cable gland, use the HS5D interlock switch with M0 gland port (Part No.: HS5D- ***BM) together with an adaptor (Part No.: MA-M/NPT 0X , LAPP) and a gasket (Part No.: GP M0, LAPP). Install a gasket between the interlock switch and the adaptor. Apply sealing tape between the cable gland and the adaptor to make sure of IP67 protection for the enclosure. 30

31 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Small safety switch with four poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in tight spaces. Compact body mm. Rear unlocking button for emergency escape available. Also available is the rear unlocking button kit. A variety of circuits dual safety circuit and four-circuit independent outputs available. Gold-plated contacts. Spring lock and solenoid lock are available. The head orientation can be rotated, allowing 8 different actuator entries. A metal entry slot ensures high durability. An actuator with rubber bushings alleviates the impact of actuator entry into the slot. The actuator retention force is 00N minimum (GS-ET-9). Integral cable design minimizes wiring, preventing wiring mistakes. LED indicator indicates the solenoid status. Double insulation structure. Spring Lock Automatically locks the actuator without power applied to the solenoid. After the machine stops, unlocking is completed by the solenoid, providing high safety features. Manual unlocking is possible in the event of power failure or maintenance. Solenoid Lock The actuator is locked when energized. The actuator is unlocked when de-energized. Flexible locking function can be achieved for an application where locking is not required and sudden stopping of machine must be prevented. Specifications Angle Adjustable (vertical) Right-angle (SUS30) Straight (SUS30) w/rubber Bushings Rear unlocking button Sliding ISO9, IEC , EN (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved), UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized), GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC600-/EN600- (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature 5 to +50 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand Voltage.5 kv (between LED, solenoid and grounding: 0.5 kv) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Insulation Resistance Between live metal part and ground: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Protection Class II (IEC60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC6059) Shock Resistance Operating extremes: 00 m/s (0G) Damage limits: 000 m/s (00G) Vibration Resistance Operating extremes: 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel HS9Z-A5: mm minimum HS9Z-A5A/A5/A5A/A53/A55: mm minimum Direct Opening Force 80N minimum Retention Force 00N minimum (GS-ET-9) (See page 38 for actuator retention force.) Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Rear Unlock Button Mechanical Durability 3000 operations minimum (HS5E-**L) Mechanical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) 00,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load AC-, 50V, A) Electrical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load V AC/DC. 00mA) Conditional Short-circuit Current 50A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast acting type fuse for short-circuit protection.) UL6 Cable HS5E-V: AWG (-core, 0.3 mm/core) Others: AWG(8-core: 0.5 mm/core) Cable Outside Diameter ø7.6 mm Weight (approx.) 00g (m cable), 580g ( cable), 770g ( cable). Add 0g for rear unlocking button. HS5E 3

32 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Ratings Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Four-circuit Independent Output (HS5E-V) 50V (between LED or solenoid and ground: 30V).5A Operating temp.: 5 C to 35 C (not included).5a ( or circuits).0a (3 or circuits) Operating temp.: 35 C to 50 C.0A ( circuit) 0.5A ( to circuits) Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive.5A.5A Load (AC-) AC Inductive Rated.5A 0.75A Load (AC-5) Current (Ie) Resistive.5A.A 0.55A Load (DC-) DC Inductive.3A 0.55A 0.7A Load (DC-3) Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma (Applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types.) TÜV rating: AC-5 50V/0.75A DC-3 5V/0.A DC-3 30V/.3A UL/c-UL rating: 5V AC/.5A Pilot Duty 5V DC/0.A Pilot Duty CCC rating: AC-5 50V/0.75A DC-3 5V/0.A DC-3 30V/.3A Solenoid Unit Locking Mechanism Spring Lock Solenoid Lock Rated Operating Current V DC (00% duty cycle) Rated Current 66 ma (initial value) Coil Resistance 90Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 85% maximum (at 0 C) Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Rated Voltage 0% Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Continuous Insulation Class Class F Indicator Rated Voltage Rated Current Light Source Illumination Color V DC 0 ma LED Green Part No. Development HS5E-AL0-G Code Main Door Monitor Lock Monitor A: NC + NC NO NO B: NC + NC NO NC C: NC + NC NC NO D: NC + NC NC NC F: NC + NC NC G: NC + NC NC, NO H: NC + NC NC J: NC + NC NC, NO DD: NC + NC NC + NC VA: VB: VC: VD: NC, NO NC, NO NC NC NC, NO NC NC, NO NC Indicator Color G: Green Cable Length 0: m 03: 05: Rear Unlocking Button L: With rear unlocking button Blank: Without rear unlocking button LED Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC 0: Without indicator Solenoid Unit Voltage/Lock Mechanism : V DC/Spring Lock 7Y: V DC/Solenoid Lock 3

33 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Standard Lock Mechanism Code Contact Configuration Indicator Spring Lock A B C D F G H J Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) A A Main : NC+NC, Door NO, Lock NO Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NO, Lock NC Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NO Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NC Main : NC+NC, Door NC Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Main : NC+NC, Lock NC Main : NC+NC, Lock NC, NO The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. The contact configuration shows the status when the indicator is installed. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately Main : 5 5 Main : Main : Main : Main : Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Cable Length m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m Part No. HS5E-A00 HS5E-A003 HS5E-A005 HS5E-A0-G HS5E-A03-G HS5E-A05-G HS5E-B00 HS5E-B003 HS5E-B005 HS5E-B0-G HS5E-B03-G HS5E-B05-G HS5E-C00 HS5E-C003 HS5E-C005 HS5E-C0-G HS5E-C03-G HS5E-C05-G HS5E-D00 HS5E-D003 HS5E-D005 HS5E-D0-G HS5E-D03-G HS5E-D05-G HS5E-F00 HS5E-F003 HS5E-F005 HS5E-F0-G HS5E-F03-G HS5E-F05-G HS5E-G00 HS5E-G003 HS5E-G005 HS5E-G0-G HS5E-G03-G HS5E-G05-G HS5E-H00 HS5E-H003 HS5E-H005 HS5E-H0-G HS5E-H03-G HS5E-H05-G HS5E-J00 HS5E-J003 HS5E-J005 HS5E-J0-G HS5E-J03-G HS5E-J05-G 33

34 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Standard Lock Mechanism Code Contact Configuration Indicator Solenoid Lock A B C D F G H J Main : NC+NC, Door NO, Lock NO Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NO, Lock NC Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NO Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NC Main : Main : NC+NC, Door NC Main : Lock Monitor (Solenoid ON) (+) ( ) A A Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO Main : Main : NC+NC, Lock NC Main : Main : NC+NC, Lock NC, NO Main : Door Monitor ( inserted) The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. The contact configuration shows the status when the indicator is installed. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With Cable Length m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m Part No. HS5E-A7Y00 HS5E-A7Y003 HS5E-A7Y005 HS5E-A7Y0-G HS5E-A7Y03-G HS5E-A7Y05-G HS5E-B7Y00 HS5E-B7Y003 HS5E-B7Y005 HS5E-B7Y0-G HS5E-B7Y03-G HS5E-B7Y05-G HS5E-C7Y00 HS5E-C7Y003 HS5E-C7Y005 HS5E-C7Y0-G HS5E-C7Y03-G HS5E-C7Y05-G HS5E-D7Y00 HS5E-D7Y003 HS5E-D7Y005 HS5E-D7Y0-G HS5E-D7Y03-G HS5E-D7Y05-G HS5E-F7Y00 HS5E-F7Y003 HS5E-F7Y005 HS5E-F7Y0-G HS5E-F7Y03-G HS5E-F7Y05-G HS5E-G7Y00 HS5E-G7Y003 HS5E-G7Y005 HS5E-G7Y0-G HS5E-G7Y03-G HS5E-G7Y05-G HS5E-H7Y00 HS5E-H7Y003 HS5E-H7Y005 HS5E-H7Y0-G HS5E-H7Y03-G HS5E-H7Y05-G HS5E-J7Y00 HS5E-J7Y003 HS5E-J7Y005 HS5E-J7Y0-G HS5E-J7Y03-G HS5E-J7Y05-G 3

35 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Rear Unlocking Button Lock Mechanism Code Contact Configuration Indicator Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) A A Cable Length m Part No. HS5E-AL0-G A Main : NC+NC, Door NO, Lock NO Main : HS5E-AL03-G HS5E-AL05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NO m HS5E-CL0-G C Main : 53 5 HS5E-CL03-G HS5E-CL05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, Lock NC m HS5E-DL0-G Spring Lock D Main : 5 5 With HS5E-DL03-G HS5E-DL05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC m HS5E-FL0-G F Main : 3 3 HS5E-FL03-G HS5E-FL05-G Main : NC+NC, Door NC, NO m HS5E-GL0-G G Main : 33 3 HS5E-GL03-G HS5E-GL05-G The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. Dual Safety Lock Mechanism Code Contact Configuration Indicator Spring Lock DD Door Monitor ( inserted) Main : NC+NC NC+NC Main j: Main k: (+) ( ) A A The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. Lock Monitor (Solenoid OFF) 5 5 With Cable Length m Part No. HS5E-DD0-G HS5E-DD03-G HS5E-DD05-G 35

36 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Four-circuit Independent Output Lock Mechanism Code Contact Configuration Indicator VA Door Monitor ( inserted) Lock Monitor (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) A A Door NC, NO, Lock NC, NO Door NC, NO, Lock NC Cable Length m m Part No. HS5E-VA0-G HS5E-VA03-G HS5E-VA05-G HS5E-VB0-G Spring Lock VB Door NC, Lock NC, NO With m HS5E-VB03-G HS5E-VB05-G HS5E-VC0-G VC 53 5 HS5E-VC03-G HS5E-VC05-G Door NC, Lock NC m HS5E-VD0-G VD 5 5 HS5E-VD03-G HS5E-VD05-G Door Monitor ( inserted) Lock Monitor (Solenoid ON) (+) ( ) A A m HS5E-VA7Y0-G VA Door NC, NO, Lock NC, NO HS5E-VA7Y03-G HS5E-VA7Y05-G Door NC, NO, Lock NC m HS5E-VB7Y0-G Solenoid Lock VB Door NC, Lock NC, NO With m HS5E-VB7Y03-G HS5E-VB7Y05-G HS5E-VC7Y0-G VC 53 5 HS5E-VC7Y03-G HS5E-VC7Y05-G Door NC, Lock NC m HS5E-VD7Y0-G VD 5 5 HS5E-VD7Y03-G HS5E-VD7Y05-G The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. 36

37 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Dimensions HS5E- -G (with indicator) Horizontal Mounting/Straight (HS9Z-A5) RP R. 5. RP R Stop (supplied separately) (6.3) Stop (supplied separately) (6.3) Slot Plug (supplied with the switch) (Note) 6.6 ± * to ± * 33 0 * center position 0 -M (ø.3 or M tapped hole) Mounting Hole Layout se our ounting screws to ount the interloc switch according to the ounting hole layout. 0 Vertical Mounting/Right-angle (HS9Z-A5) Acuator Cover Stop (supplied separately) RP RP R. 0 (6.3) Cover Stop (supplied separately) R (6.3) Slot Plug (supplied with the switch) (Note) ± * 5 * center position to 06 -M (ø.3 or M tapped hole) Mounting Hole Layout ± * se our ounting screws to ount the interloc switch according to the ounting hole layout. HS5E- L -G (rear unlocking button) Horizontal Mounting/Straight (HS9Z-A5) HS9Z-A5 RP ( Mounting Reference Position) LOCK UNLOCK R. (6.3) 0 35 All dimensions in mm. X 6 Panel mounting 6 < X < 3 Not mountable 3 X 53 Use HS9Z-FL5 rear unlocking button kit X = Panel thickness (including panel, mounting frame, and mounting plate) Note: See page 39 for details. 6 ± 6.6 ± 33 0 Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the plug supplied with the switch. 5 0 Rear Unlocking Button (supplied with the switch) ø Rear Unlocking Button 06 M 0 3. ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) 06 0 to -ø.3 or M tapped holes Note: With the mounting hole dimension, the rear unlocking button rod does not touch the hole even when the interlock switch moves sideways. Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure on the right, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is where the actuator stop placed on the actuator lightly touches the interlock switch. Note: After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator stop from the actuator. Stop HS9Z-A5 Door Stop Door Stop Stop Cover HS9Z-A5 37

38 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid s Description Retention Force Part No. Straight HS9Z-A5 Straight w/rubber bushings HS9Z-A5A Right-angle 00N minimum HS9Z-A5 Right-angle w/rubber bushings HS9Z-A5A Angle Adjustable (vertical) HS9Z-A53 Angle Adjustable (vertical/horizontal) (Note ) 500N minimum HS9Z-A55 Sliding (Note ) 000N minimum HS9Z-SH5 Note : When retention force of more than 500N is required, use HS9Z-A53. Note : For details, see page 76. Dimensions and Mounting Hole Layouts Straight (HS9Z-A5) (6) Right-angle (HS9Z-A5) R. 6. Stop (supplied with the actuator) (Note) Mounting Hole Layout (Straight, L-shaped) -M Screw 0 -ø.3 30 (0) Washer (supplied with the switch) -ø0 0.8 When mounted (5) -ø9 Rubber Bushing 5 Stop (Note) Stop Film (supplied with the actuator) 8 Horizontal Adjustment 3 Orienting Insert Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Stop (Note) R3. Door hinge side Vertical Adjustment Orienting Insert Stop (Note) 3.6 R. (M Holes) 0.8 Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Acuator Stop (supplied with the actuator) (Note) -ø. Cover Straight w/rubber Bushings (HS9Z-A5A) Vertical Swing The mounting center distance is set to mm at factory. When 0-mm distance is required, adjust the distance by moving the rubber bushings. The actuator has flexiblity to the direction indicated by the arrows. When 0-mm distance is selected, the actuator swings vertically. Mounting Hole Layout Straight (with rubber bushings) Right-angle (with rubber bushings) -M Screw Note: Mounting centers can be widened to 0 mm by moving the rubber bushings. Right-angle w/rubber Bushings (HS9Z-A5A) When mounted (.) 30 Rubber Bushing When mounted (5) ø9 When mounted (39.7) 0.8 -ø Washer (supplied with the actuator) Horizontal Swing Vertical Swing (0) Stop (plastic) (Note) (supplied with the actuator) -ø.3 When the mounting center distance is set to mm, the actuator has flexibility both vertically and horizontally. When the mounting center distance is set to 0 mm, the actuator swings vertically. Adjust the distance by moving the rubber bushings. Angle Adjustable (vertical) (HS9Z-A53) Angle Adjustable (vertical/horizontal) (HS9Z-A55) 9 33 max. () Angle Adjustment (hexagon sockethead bolt) 0 Mounting Hole Layout (vertical swing) -M6 Screw 58 Note: The actuator stop is supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove after the actuator position is determined. 0 Orientation The orientation of actuator swing (horizontal/vertical) can be changed using the orienting insert (white plastic) installed on the back of the actuator. Do not lose the orientating insert, otherwise the actuator will not swing properly. Mounting Hole Layout (horizontal/vertical swing) -M Screw 38 38

39 HS5E Accessories HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Description Part No. Remarks Sliding HS9Z-SH5 See page 76 for details. Handle unit for right-hand door HS9Z-DH5RH Door Handle Choose according to the required opening side. Handle unit for left-hand door HS9Z-DH5LH (See page 68) Switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C Used for installing the interlock switch inside. Plug HS9Z-A5P Padlock Hasp HS9Z-PH5 Mounting Plate (Note ) HS9Z-SP5 When using the HS5E- L -G, provide a mounting hole for the unlocking button as shown below in the mounting plate mounting hole layout. HS9Z-FL53 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 3 < X 33 (0 < X 30 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) Rear Unlocking Button Kit (Note ) HS9Z-FL5 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 33 < X 3 (30 < X 0 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) HS9Z-FL55 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 3 < X 53 (0 < X 50 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) Note : When mounting HS5E-KVA0L (rear unlocking button) using a mounting plate, provide mounting holes on the mounting plate as shown below and use Rear Unlocking Button Kit (HS9Z-FL5 ). Note : See the table at right for choosing rear unlocking button kit. Dimensions Mounting Plate (HS9Z-SP5) R3.3 Manual Unlocking Key (metal) (HS9Z-T3) Drilling Rear Unlocking Button Hole 0 ø -M R6. ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) 87 -M Screws Manual Unlocking Key (plastic) ø0 -C3 Material: Anodized aluminum A6063 Weight: Approx. 80g When installing the HS5E- L -G (rear unlocking button), provide a rear unlocking button hole on the HS9Z-SP Rear Unlocking Button Kit (HS9Z-FL5 ) Hinge + Plate (SUS) Button (PA66) 0 Rear Unlocking Button Kit Mounting Hole Layout or -M Screws HS5E-L (sold separately) ø ø0 Button pressed (unlocked) Button released ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) to 30 Pin (SUS) Total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate: 3 to 53 mm Note: With the mounting hole dimension, the rear unlocking button rod does not touch the hole even when the interlock switch moves sideways. Link Rod (SUS) Example: When mounting on 30mm-thick frame using HS9Z-SP5 mounting plate, the panel thickness is 0 (0 + 30). Select HS9Z-FL5 rear unlocking button kit. Screw (Iron) 39

40 LOCK UNLOCK HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Standard and Rear Unlocking - Spring Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Manual Unlock Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Press Door Status LOCK UNLOCK Turn the manual Press the rear unlock key unlocking button (Note ) (Note ) Diagram (HS5E-A) (+) ( ) A A (+) A ( ) A (+) ( ) A A (+) ( ) A A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Contact Configuration Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( Inserted) (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) HS5E-A A A Main : HS5E-B Main : 3 HS5E-C Main : HS5E-D Main : HS5E-F Main : HS5E-G Main : HS5E-H Main : HS5E-J Main : Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door open) 3- Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) 5 5 OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) 5 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) 3 3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 33 3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (locked) 6 6 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (unlocked) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Closed (unlocked) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. Main : Connected to the control circuit of machine drive part, sending interlock signals of the protective door. Sends monitoring signals of protective door open/closed status or protective door lock/unlock status. Note : can be unlocked manually for confirming the door movement before wiring and energizing, and also for emergency situation such as power failure. Note : When the operator is confined in a hazardous zone, the Operation Chracteristics (reference) actuator can be unlocked manually by pressing the rear 0 ( insertion position) unlocking button. 3.3 (Locked position) (travel in mm) Main The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are of the Monitor (door open, NO) Contacts ON (closed) HS9Z-A5. For other actuators, add.3 mm. Monitor (door closed, NC) The operation characteristics show the contact status when the Monitor (unlocked, NO) Contacts OFF (open) actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch. Monitor (locked, NC) 5 0

41 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Standard - Solenoid Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Unlocked with Manual Unlocking Key Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized energized Door Status LOCK UNLOCK Manual Unlock Status Diagram (HS5E-A7Y) (+) ( ) A A (+) A ( ) A (+) ( ) A A (+) ( ) A A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Contact Configuration Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid ON) (+) ( ) A A HS5E-A7Y Main : HS5E-B7Y Main : HS5E-C7Y Main : HS5E-D7Y Main : HS5E-F7Y Main : HS5E-G7Y Main : HS5E-H7Y Main : HS5E-J7Y Main : Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door open) 3- Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) 5 5 OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) 5 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open). ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) 3 3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 33 3 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (locked) 6 6 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (unlocked) 63 6 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. Main : Connected to the control circuit of machine drive part, sending interlock signals of the protective door. Sends monitoring signals of protective door open/closed status or protective door lock/unlock status. Operation Chracteristics (reference) 0 ( insertion position) 3.3 (Locked position) (travel in mm) Main Monitor (door open, NO) Contacts ON (closed) Monitor (door closed, NC) Monitor (unlocked, NO) Contacts OFF (open) Monitor (locked, NC) ON (energized) (Note ) Closed (unlocked) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF to ON (Note ) (Note ) Note : Do not attempt manual unlocking when the solenoid is energized. Note : Do not energize the solenoid for a long time while the door is open or when the door is unlocked manually. The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A5. For other actuators, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch.

42 LOCK UNLOCK HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Dual Safety Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Unlocked with Manual Unlocking Key Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Status LOCK UNLOCK Turn the manual unlock key (Note) Diagram (HS5E-DD) (+) ( ) A A (+) ( ) A A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) Contact Configuration Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) A A HS5E-DD Main ➀: Main ➁: 5 5 Main ➀ Main ➁ 5 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. Main : Connected to the control circuit of machine drive part, sending interlock signals of the protective door. Note: can be unlocked manually for confirming the door movement before wiring and energizing, and also for emergency situation such as power failure. Operation Chracteristics (reference) Main 0 ( insertion position) 3.3 (Locked position) (travel in mm) Contacts ON (closed) Contacts OFF (open) The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A5. For other actuators, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch.

43 LOCK UNLOCK HS5E Four-circuit Independent Output - Spring Lock HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Unlocked with Manual Unlocking Key Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Status LOCK UNLOCK Turn the manual unlock key (Note) Diagram (HS5E-VA) (+) ( ) A A (+) A ( ) A (+) ( ) A A (+) ( ) A A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Contact Configuration HS5E- VA 3 HS5E-VB 3 HS5E-VC HS5E-VD Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( Inserted) (Solenoid OFF) 53 5 (+) A ( ) A Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) Monitor (locked) 5 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Closed (unlocked) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. Sends monitoring signals of protective door open/closed status or protective door lock/unlock status. Note: can be unlocked manually for confirming the door movement before wiring and energizing, and also for emergency situation such as power failure. Operation Chracteristics (reference) 0 ( insertion position) 3.3 (Locked position) Monitor (door open, NO) Monitor (door closed, NC) Monitor (unlocked, NO) Monitor (locked, NC) 6. (travel in mm) Contacts ON (closed) Contacts OFF (open) The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A5. For other actuators, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch. 3

44 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Four-circuit Independent Output - Solenoid Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Unlocked with Manual Unlocking Key Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized energized Door Status LOCK UNLOCK Manual Unlock Status Diagram (HS5E-VA7Y) (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) ( ) A A (+) ( ) A A Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Contact Configuration Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( Inserted) (Solenoid ON) ( ) (+) A A HS5E-VA7Y HS5E-VB7Y HS5E-VC7Y HS5E-VD7Y Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door open) 3 Monitor (locked) Monitor (locked) 5 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) Monitor (unlocked) 53 5 Monitor (door closed) Monitor (door closed) Monitor (locked) Monitor (locked) 5 5 ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Solenoid Power A-A (all model) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. Sends monitoring signals of protective door open/closed status or protective door lock/unlock status. Operation Chracteristics (reference) Monitor (door open, NO) Monitor (door closed, NC) Monitor (unlocked, NO) Monitor (locked, NC) 0 ( insertion position) 3.3 (Locked position) (travel in mm) Contacts ON (closed) Contacts OFF (open) ON (energized) (Note ) Closed (unlocked) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (de-energized) to ON (energized) (Note ) (Note ) Note : Do not attempt manual unlocking when the solenoid is energized. Note : Do not energize the solenoid for a long time while the door is open or when the door is unlocked manually. The operation characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A5. For other actuators, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch.

45 HS5E Safety Precautions HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform a risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a breakdown or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in a location where the human body may come in contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Solenoid lock is locked when energized, and unlocked when de-energized. When energization is interrupted due to wire disconnection or other failures, the interlock switch may be unlocked causing possible danger to the operators. Solenoid lock must not be used in applications where locking is strictly required for safety. Perform a risk assessment and determine whether solenoid lock is appropriate. When changing the head orientation, disconnect the cable and turn the manual unlock to the UNLOCK position in advance. If the head orientation is changed when the cable is connected and the manual unlock is in the LOCK position, machines may start to operate, causing danger to the operators. When using the four-circuit independent output type as an input to safety circuit, connect the door monitor circuits (-, -, 3-3) and lock monitor circuits (-, 5-5, 6-6) in series. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a breakdown. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Use proprietary actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Loosening the screws may cause damage to the interlock switch. The actuator retention force is 00N. Do not apply a load higher than the rated value. When a higher load is expected, provide an additional system consisting of another interlock switch without lock (such as the HS5B interlock switch) or a sensor to detect door opening and stop the machine. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. While the solenoid is energized, the interlock switch temperature rises approximately 0 C above the ambient temperature (to approximately 90 C while the ambient temperature is 50 C). To prevent burns, do not touch. If cables come into contact with the interlock switch, use heat-resistant cables. Solenoid has polarity. Be sure of the correct polarity when wiring, otherwise solenoid will be damaged. Do not apply voltage over the rated voltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. Although the HS9Z-A5A and HS9Z-A5A actuators (w/ rubber bushings) alleviate the shock when the actuator enters a slot in the interlock switch, make sure that excessive shock is not applied. If the rubber bushings become deformed or cracked, replace with new ones. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A53 or HS9Z-A55). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-A5 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Minimum Radius 70 mm (36.) 90 mm (35) Mounting Holes When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Minimum Radius 30 mm 60 mm (.5) (0.3) (3) (6) Mounting Holes HS9Z-A5A (w/rubber bushings) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Centers mm: 0 mm Centers 0 mm: 70 mm Minimum Radius (36.) 0mm (35) Mounting Holes () 5

46 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Instructions When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Centers mm: 30 mm Centers 0 mm: 30 mm Minimum Radius (8.) 60mm (7) (3) Mounting Holes Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing on page 5). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not move. When using the HS9Z-A53 Angle Adjustable (vertical) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80 mm Mounting Examples Application on Sliding Doors Door HS9Z-A5 HS5E Interlock Switch Latch Door Stop Application of Hinged Doors HS9Z-A5 HS5E HS9Z-SH5 Sliding Door Installing the Head Do not use the plastic and metal head of he HS5B interlock switches on the HS5E. The metal heads of the HS5E and HS5B interlock switches look similar. When using these interlock switches adjacently, ensure that the heads are not interchanged. HS5B HS5E Plastic Head Plastic (black or gray) Metal Head Metal Metal Head (silver color) (gray) black 50 mm Door Hinge Mounting Hole (36.) (38) 80 mm (56.5) Mounting Hole When using the HS9Z-A55 Angle Adjustable (vertical/horizontal) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm Horizontal Swing 50 mm Door Hinge (36.) Vertical Swing 50 mm Door Hinge (36.) Mounting Hole (38) (68) The HS5E metal head can be distinguished easily with the black plastic part (HS5E metal head has gray plastic part). Rotating the Head The head of the HS5E can be rotated by removing the four screws from the corners of the HS5E head and reinstalling the head in the desired orientation. Before wiring the HS5E, replace the head if necessary. Before replacing the head, turn the manual unlock to the UNLOCK position using the manual unlock key. When reinstalling the head, make sure that no foreign object enters the interlock switch. Tighten the screws tightly, without leaving space between the head and body, otherwise the interlock switch may malfunction. Recommended tightening torque: 0.9 to. N m. Factory Setting Head can be rotated. When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 70 mm Horizontal Swing Vertical Swing 70 mm 70 mm Mounting Hole (58) (55.5) (55.5) 6

47 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Instructions For Manual Unlocking Spring lock The HS5E allows manual unlocking of the actuator to precheck proper door movement before wiring or turning power on, as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Solenoid lock The solenoid lock interlock switch normally does not need the manual unlock. However, only when the interlock switch would not release the actuator even though the solenoid is de-energized, the interlock switch can be unlocked manually. Unlock the interlock switch manually only when the solenoid is de-energized. Do not unlock the interlock switch manually when the solenoid is energized. LOCK UNLOCK Lock Unlock Normal Position Lock Unlock Manual Unlocking Position When locking or unlocking the interlock switch manually, turn the key fully using the manual unlock key supplied with the interlock switch. Using the interlock switch with the key not fully turned (less than 90 ) may cause damage to the interlock switch or operation failures (when manually unlocked, the interlock switch will keep the main circuit disconnected and the door unlocked). Do not apply excessive force to the manual unlock, otherwise the manual unlock will become damaged. Do not leave the manual unlock key attached to the interlock switch during operation. This is dangerous because the interlock switch can always be unlocked while the machine is in operation. Manual Unlocking Key (supplied with the switch) Safety Precautions Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of interlock switch with solenoid is lost. Installing the Rear Unlocking Button After installing the interlock switch on the panel, place the rear unlocking button (supplied with the switch) on the push rod on the back of the interlock switch, and fasten the button using the M3 sems screw. Rear unlocking button can be installed alone when the total thickness of mounting frame and panel is 6 mm or less. When the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is 3 to 53 mm, use the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z-FL5 ) sold separately. Safety Precautions After installing the rear unlocking button, apply Loctite to the screw so that the screw does not become loose. The button is made of glass-reinforced PA66 (66 nylon). The screw is made of iron. Take the compatibility of the plastic material and Loctite into consideration. Installing the Rear Unlocking Button Kit. Install the connecting rod onto the push rod on the HS5E-L rear unlocking button interlock switch.. A pin is attached to the connecting rod. Insert the pin into the hole in the push rod, using pliers. 3. Pull the connecting rod from the hole in the mounting frame, and turn the button operating pin to the horizontal position. Connecting Rod Pull Connecting Rod Orientation Correct Incorrect Safety Precautions Ensure that the connecting rod is pulled out completely and it is horizontal to the interlock switch, otherwise the unlocking button cannot be installed. Note: Frame must be supplied by the user. For the mounting hole layout of interlock switches, see page. When using the mounting plate HS9Z-SP5, provide a hole for the connecting rod in the plate according to the mounting plate mounting hole layout shown on page 6.. Install the unlocking button on the connecting rod by fitting the pin to the grooves on the back of the button, and fasten the base plate on the mounting frame using the screws. Button Groove Unlocking Button Button Operating Pin Base Plate Push Rod Connecting Rod HS5E-L Pin Mounting Frame Screw 5. After fastening the screws, check if locking and unlocking operations can be performed. Panel Push Rod Rear Unlocking Button Mounting Screw HS5E-L 7

48 HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Instructions Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button kit in the correct direction as shown below. Do not install the kit in incorrect directions, otherwise malfunction will be caused. Correct Incorrect Do not apply strong force exceeding 00 m/s to the interlock switch while the rear unlocking button is not pressed, otherwise malfunction will be caused. Manual Unlocking using the Rear Unlocking Button The rear unlocking button is used by the operator confined in a hazardous area for emergent escape. Recommended Tightening Torque HS5E interlock switch:.8 to. N m (four M screws) (Note) Rear unlocking button: 0.5 to 0.7 N m Rear unlocking button kit:.8 to 5. N m (M5 screw) s HS9Z-A5:.8 to. N m (two M screws) HS9Z-A5: 0.8 to. N m (two M Phillips screws) HS9Z-A5A/A5A:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) HS9Z-A53:.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) HS9Z-A55:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) Note: The above recommended tightening torque of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator are installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws or welding the screws. When installing the HS9Z-A5A and HS9Z-A5A actuators, use the washer (supplied with the actuator) on the hinged door, and mount tightly using two M screws. Mounting centers: mm (factory setting), adjustable to 0 mm Unlock Rear Unlocking Button Unlock M Screw Washer Rubber Bushing Rear Unlocking Button How to operate When the rear unlocking button is pressed, the interlock switch is unlocked and the door can be opened. To lock the interlock switch, pull back the button. When the button remains pressed, the interlock switch cannot be locked even if the door is closed, and the main circuit remains open. Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button in the place where only the operator inside the hazardous area can use it. Do not install the button in the place where an operator outside the hazardous area can use it, otherwise the interlock switch can be unlocked during usual machine operation, causing danger. Operate the rear unlocking button by hand only. Do not operate using a tool or with excessive force. Do not apply force to the button from the direction other than the proper direction, otherwise the button will be damaged. Hinged Door M Screw Hole Note: Choose mounting centers of either mm or 0 mm. Cables Do not fasten or loosen the gland at the bottom of the safety switch. When bending the cable during wiring, make sure that the cable radius is kept at 30 mm minimum. When wiring, make sure that water or oil does not enter the cable. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Otherwise the interlock switch will be damaged. Lid Gland Minimum Radius 30 mm min. (8) 8

49 HS5E HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Instructions Wire Identification Wires can be identified by color and a white line printed on the wire. HS5E-V: Wires of gray and gray/white insulation cannot be used. HS5E-DD: Wires of brown and brown/white insulation cannot be used. No. Insulation No. Insulation No. Insulation No. Insulation White Blue 7 Blue/White 0 Pink/White Black 5 Brown/White 8 Orange/White Gray 3 Brown 6 Orange 9 Pink Gray/White HS5E-V Insulation Jacket Other Dummy Insulation Terminal Number Identification When wiring, the terminal number of each contact can be identified by wire color. The following table shows the identification of terminal numbers. Model HS5E-A HS5E-B HS5E-C HS5E-D HS5E-F Main : Main : Main : Orange Main : Orange Main : Orange Brown Blue Orange 3 Blue Orange 3 Blue Blue Blue Diagram Door Monitor Blue/White Orange/White Brown 53 5 Brown/White Orange/White Brown 5 Blue/White Orange/White Brown 53 5 Brown/White Orange/White Brown 5 Lock Monitor (+) ( ) White A A Black Blue/White 5 Brown/White Blue/White 5 Brown/White Blue/White Orange/White 3 3 Brown/White Model HS5E-VA HS5E-VB Orange HS5E-VC Orange HS5E-VD Orange Blue Orange 3 Blue Blue Blue Door Monitor 3 Diagram (+) White A Lock Monitor ( ) A Black Blue/White Pink Pink/White Orange/White Brown 53 5 Brown/White Blue/White Pink Pink/White Orange/White Brown 5 5 Brown/White Blue/White Pink Pink/White Orange/White Brown 53 5 Brown/White Blue/White Pink Pink/White Orange/White Brown 5 5 Brown/White The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and locked. HS5E-G Main : Blue Orange Brown 33 Orange/White 3 Brown/White Blue/White HS5E-H Main : Blue Blue/White Brown 5 5 Brown/White Orange 6 6 Orange/White HS5E-J Main : Blue Blue/White Brown 5 5 Brown/White Orange 63 6 Orange/White HS5E-DD Main ➀: Blue Main ➁: Orange Blue/White 5 5 Orange/White When wiring, cut unnecessary wires such as the dummy insulation (white) and any unused wires. 9

50 HS5E-K es with Key New interlock switches that can be locked and unlocked with a key. Head removal detection circuitry. High-security pin tumbler key is used. Sixteen types of key numbers are available. Available with rear unlocking button for emergency escape. Accessory available for aluminum frame mounting. Angle Adjustable Gold-plated contacts. (vertical) The locking strength is 00N minimum. (GS-ET-9) The head orientation can be rotated, allowing 8 different actuator entries. Metal actuator entry slot ensures high durability. with rubber bushings alleviates the impact of the actuator entry slot. Environmentally-friendly. RoHs directive compliant. Double insulation structure. No need for grounding. Compact body: mm Right-angle (SUS30) Right-angle w/rubber bushings Straight Ratings Contact Rating Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) (Note ) 50V Operating temperature: 5 C to 60 C:.5A max. Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 60 C to 65 C:.5A max. 65 C to 70 C:.0A max. Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Rated Current (Ie) (Note ) AC DC Resistive Load (AC-).5A.5A Inductive Load (AC-5).5A 0.75A Resistive Load (DC-).5A.A 0.55A Inductive Load (DC-5).3A 0.55A 0.7A Minimum applicable load (reference value) = 3V AC/DC, 5 ma (Applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types.) Approved ratings TÜV UL/c-UL AC-5 50V/0.75A DC-3 5V/0.A DC-3 30V/.3A AC 5V/.5A Pilot Duty DC 5V/0.A Pilot Duty Key Specifications Operating Method Mechanical Durability Insertion/Removal Durability Operator Strength Direct Opening Force Direct Opening Angle Part No. Development -position maintained 00,000 operations minimum 0,000 operations minimum.0 N m minimum 0.6 N m minimum 60 minimum HS5E-KVA0L03-A50 Code Main Door Monitor Lock Monitor VA: VD: NC, NO NC NC, NO NC Pilot Light 0: None Rear Unlocking Button L: With Blank: Without Cable Length 03: 05: Key number Blank: Standard Key number (500) or 50 to 55 Key removal specifications A: Removable in all positions B: Removable at UNLOCK C: Removable at LOCK Operator position : -position General Specifications ISO9, IEC EN (TÜV approved) EN088, GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards UL508 (UL recognized) CSA C. No. (c-ul recognized) IEC600-/EN600- (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature -5 to +70 C (No freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation) Storage Temperature -0 to +80 C (No freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand.5 kv Voltage Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Between live metal part and ground: Insulation Resistance 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) (500V DC megger) Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Class Class II (IEC60) Degree of Protection IP65 (IEC6059) Operating extremes: 00 m/s Shock Resistance Damage limits:,000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating 0.05 to.0 m/s Speed HS9Z-A5: mm minimum Direct Opening Travel HS9Z-A5A/A5/A5A/A53/A55: mm minimum Direct Opening Force 80N minimum Retention,00N minimum (GS-ET-9) Force (Note ) Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Rear Unlocking Button Mechanical 3,000 operations minimum (HS5E-K L) Durability Mechanical Durability,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) 00,000 operations minimum (AC-, 50V, A),000,000 operations minimum (V AC/DC, 00 Electrical Durability ma) (Operating frequency: 900 operations per hour) Performance between Mechanical durability: 0 operations minimum and when head Insulation resistance: 00 MΩ (initial value) is removed Withstand voltage:,000v for minute (initial value) Conditional Shortcircuit Current 50A (50V) (Note ) UL6, No. AWG Cable (-core, 0.3 mm or equivalent/core) Cable Diameter ø7.6 mm Weight (approx.) 50g ( cable), 680g ( cable) Note : See page 5 for actuator retention force. Note : Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection. 50

51 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Head Removal Detection ry (patented) Head removal detection circuitry is employed in the HS5E-K. With this innovative function, the monitor circuit (-) turns off when the head is removed from the switch, such as when removing the head to change the head direction (applicable with all models of HS5E-K). With the head installed on the switch, monitor circuits - and 5-5 operate in synchronization while the key locks/unlocks the actuator. When the head is removed, - turns off and 5-5 turns on. This disagreement is detected by the head removal detection function. Monitor circuit (-) with head removal detection function unlocked locked Head removed unlocked locked LOCK UNLOCK OFF ON Monitor (NC) Pink Pink/White Monitor Brown 5 5 Brown/White (NC) OFF ON Note: Head removal detection function is not direct opening. unlocked locked Head removed OFF ON Head removed Disagreement Monitor (NC) Monitor (NC) Pink Brown (+) ( ) Pink/White 5 5 Brown/White OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Maintenance Mode Change Door Handle LD6A Series SignaLight HS5E-K Key Interlock Switch + Door Handle XW Series Emergency Stop Switch HW Series Key Selector Switch (Pin Tumbler) Single Key! Mode Change Door Unlocked (safety output OFF) Hazards of the system and robot are isolated by the safety guard. When a worker needs to work inside the hazardous area for maintenance, the worker stops the machine using the key to change modes (), unlock the guard using the key, then remove the key to bring inside the safety guard (). The worker can switch operation modes and unlock the safety guard using a single key. Furthermore, when the key is taken inside the hazardous area, the guard cannot be locked and the system cannot be turned on. This enables the worker to work safely in the hazardous area. 5

52 HS5E-K es with Key Package Quantity: Rear Unlocking Button Code Contact Configuration Key Removal Position Cable Length Part No. A (removable in all positions) HS5E-KVA003-A HS5E-KVA005-A VA Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : 3 LOCK UNLOCK B (removal in UNLOCK position) HS5E-KVA003-B HS5E-KVA005-B Without Monitor : 53 5 C (removable in LOCK position) A (removable in all positions) HS5E-KVA003-C HS5E-KVA005-C HS5E-KVD003-A HS5E-KVD005-A VD Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : 5 5 B (removal in UNLOCK position) C (removable in LOCK position) HS5E-KVD003-B HS5E-KVD005-B HS5E-KVD003-C HS5E-KVD005-C A (removable in all positions) HS5E-KVA0L03-A HS5E-KVA0L05-A VA Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : 3 LOCK UNLOCK 53 5 B (removal in UNLOCK position) HS5E-KVA0L03-B HS5E-KVA0L05-B With C (removable in LOCK position) A (removable in all positions) HS5E-KVA0L03-C HS5E-KVA0L05-C HS5E-KVD0L03-A HS5E-KVD0L05-A VD Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : Monitor : 5 5 B (removal in UNLOCK position) HS5E-KVD0L03-B HS5E-KVD0L05-B C (removable in LOCK position) HS5E-KVD0L03-C HS5E-KVD0L05-C The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. Key LOCK and UNLOCK positions are as shown on the right. s are not supplied with interlock switches and must be ordered separately. To select key numbers, specify numbers 50 to 55 after the Part No. LOCK When a key number is not specified, key number 500 is supplied as the default key. Example: HS5E-KVA003-A50 UNLOCK 500 (default key) to 55 Note: The key number is engraved on the cylinder. 5

53 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Dimensions and Mounting Layouts HS5E-K When using Horizontal Mounting / Straight (HS9Z-A5) Stop (Supplied) RP ø5 R (6.3) RP Stop (Supplied) 73. All dimensions in mm. R (6.3) Slot Plug (Note) (Supplied) to ±* 53.7 ±* M (ø.3 or M tapped hole) Mounting Hole Layout When using Vertical Mounting / Right-angle (HS9Z-A5) RP: Mounting Reference Position RP RP ø5 R. 73. R Cover Stop Film (supplied) (6.3) Cover Stop (supplied) (6.3) Slot Plug (Note) (supplied) ±* to ± * Operation Key (supplied) * center position 0 -M (ø.3 or M tapped hole) Mounting Hole Layout 0 HS5E-K L (Rear Unlocking Button) When using Horizontal Mounting / Straight (HS9Z-A5) RP: Mounting RP Reference Position HS9Z-A ø5 R. 5.7 (6.3) 0 35 Rear unlocking button mounting X 6: Panel mounting 6 < X < 3: Not mountable 3 X 53 mm: Use a rear unlocking button kit. X = Panel thickness (including panel, mounting frame, and mounting plate) 6 ± ± Rear Unlocking Button (supplied) 7.5 ø Rear Unlocking Button 06 M 0 0 Mounting Hole Layout 3. ø8 Rear Unlocking Button (Reference) 06 0 to -M (ø.3 or M tapped hole) 3. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the plug supplied with the switch. Note: With the mounting hole dimension, the rear unlocking button rod does not touch the hole even when the interlock switch moves sideways. Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure on the right, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is the position where the actuator stop placed on the actuator lightly touches the side surface of the interlock switch. Note: After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator stop from the actuator. Stop HS9Z-A5 Door Stop Door Stop Stop Cover HS9Z-A5 53

54 HS5E-K es with Key s Straight Straight with rubber bushings Right-angle Right-angle with rubber bushings Angle Adjustable (vertical) Description Part No. Retention Force HS9Z-A5 HS9Z-A5A HS9Z-A5 HS9Z-A5A HS9Z-A53,00N minimum Angle Adjustable (vertical/horizontal) HS9Z-A55 500N minimum When a retention force of 500N or more is required, use HS9Z-A53. For actuator dimensions, see page 55. See of Hinged Door on page 59 and 60 when using the HS5E-K on hinged doors. Accessories Package Quantity: Description Part No. Remarks Sliding HS9Z-SH5 See page 76 for details. Door Handle Plug Padlock Hasp Handle Unit (for right-hand door) HS9Z-DH5RH Choose according to the required opening direction. Handle Unit (for left-hand door) HS9Z-DH5LH See page 68 for details. Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C Used for installing the interlock switch inside. HS9Z-A5P HS9Z-PH5 Mounting Plate (Note ) HS9Z-SP5 Can be used for mounting on aluminum frames. HS9Z-FL53 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 3 < X 33 (0 < X 30 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL5 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 33 < X 3 (30 < X 0 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) HS9Z-FL55 Used when the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is: 3 < X 53 (0 < X 50 when switch cover unit HS9Z-DH5C is used) The mounting part is a frame or a panel that the product is mounted on. Note : When mounting HS5E-KVA0L (rear unlocking button) on an aluminum frame using the mounting plate, provide a mounting hole (see page 57) on the mounting plate and use the manual rear unlocking kit (HS9Z-FL5 ). 5

55 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Dimensions and Mounting Hole Layouts Straight (HS9Z-A5) Right-angle (HS9Z-A5) All dimensions in mm (6) R. 6. (Note) Stop (supplied with the actuator) Mounting Hole Layout (Straight, Right-angle) -M Screw Stop (supplied with the actuator) (Note) - ø..6 Cover Straight (with Rubber Bushings) (HS9Z-A5A) ø.3 30 (0) 0.8 When mounted (5) 5 Washer (supplied with the switch) - ø0 - ø9 Rubber Bushing Stop (Note) Vertical Swing The mounting center distance is set to mm at the factory. When a distance of 0 mm distance is required, adjust the distance by moving the rubber bushing sideways. The actuator has flexibility to the direction indicated by the arrows. When 0-mm distance is selected, the actuator swings vertically. Mounting Hole Layout Straight actuator (with rubber bushing) Right-angle actuator (with rubber bushing) -M Screw Mounting centers can be widened to 0 mm by moving the rubber bushings. Right-angle (with Rubber Bushings) (HS9Z-A5A) When mounted (39.7) When mounted (.) Rubber Bushing When mounted (5) -ø9 -ø Washer (supplied with the actuator) Horizontal Swing Vertical Swing (0) -ø.3 Stop (Plastic) (Note) (supplied with the actuator) When the mounting center distance is set to mm the actuator has flexibility both vertically and horizontally. When the mounting center distance is set to 0 mm, the actuator swings vertically. Adjust the distance by moving the rubber bushings. Angle Adjustable (Vertical) (HS9Z-A53) 8 Angle Adjustable (Horizontal/Vertical) (HS9Z-A55) Stop Film (supplied with the actuator) Horizontal Adjustment 3 Orienting Insert Angle Adjustable Screw (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) Stop (Note) max. () R3. Angle Adjustment (M3 hexagon socket head bolt) 0 Side Mounting Hole Layout (Vertical Swing) -M6 Screw 58 Vertical Adjustment Orienting Insert Stop (Note) (M Socket) 3.6 R. 0.8 Note: The actuator stop film and actuator stop are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove after the actuator position is determined. Angle Adjustment (M3 Hexagon Socket Head Screw) 0 Mounting Hole Layout (Horizontal/Vertical) -M Screw 38 Orientation The orientation of actuator swing (horizontal/vertical) can be changed using the orienting insert (white plastic) installed on the back of the actuator. Do not lose the orienting insert, otherwise the actuator will not operate properly. 55

56 HS5E-K es with Key Accessory Dimensions Door Handle HS9Z-DH5RH (for right-hand door) / with Key HS5E-K Stainless Steel Rear Unlocking Button Connecting Rod (SUS) ø Diecast Aluminum (plated) Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (yellow) Legend Description ➀ Handle Unit for Right-hand Door (HS9Z-DH5RH) Handle Link Shaft 8 (free-cutting Steel) ➁ Switch Cover Unit (HS9Z-DH5C) ➂ Rear Unlocking Button Kit (HS9Z-FL5 ) ➃ Interlock switch (HS5E-K) (sold separately) Handle unit for left-hand door (HS9Z-DH5LH) is available. For details, see page All dimensions in mm. Polyacetal (black) Diecast Aluminum (plated) 7 to Front Handle (diecast aluminum) (black) 8 Unlocked: 8 Locked: 8 Mounting Part Thickness (X): 0 to 50 mm PADLOCK LOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK 77 LOCK UNLOCK 3 7 Material: Stainless Steel Rear Unlocking Button (Nylon 66) (red) Panel Cut-out Right-hand Door Handle Unit (HS9Z-DH5RH) When using the HS5E-K L on the mounting panel of 3 mm or less in thickness (use the rear unlocking button). 7 to 9 36 to to 6 3 to 0 8 to (0) (7.5) (7 to 9) (6) Mounting Position Tolerance 56 Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) 6-M5 Rear Unlocking Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) Door Gap Door Gap 7 to 9 36 to 6 6 to to 0 0 (0) (7.5) (7 to 9) (6) to to M5 0.8 mm Reference 3 mm <Front View> <Rear View> 7 to 9 mm mm Reference When using the HS5E-K L on the mounting panel of 0 to 50 mm in thickness. Use the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z-FL5 ) In the figure shown on the right, 0 mm frame is used. PADLOCK LOCK UNLOCK mm 9.5 Note : Required when using the HS5E-K L. Note : Ensure that the hole in the mounting panel does not interfere with the rear handle shaft. Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) Rear Unlocking Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) (6)-M (6)-M5 <Front View> Door Gap <Rear View> Door Gap (3 to ) 56

57 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Sliding (HS9Z-SH5) Plug (HS9Z-A5P) R ø5. Rivet: Stainless Steel Handle: Aluminum 6 3 Thickness: Spacer: Steel Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: Panel Cut-out 5 6-M5 Screws 3.5 (0) Cover (Stainless Steel) Washer: Steel Padlock Hasp (HS9Z-PH5) 8 -R 8 Area -ø8 : stainless steel Thickness:.5 Area coating: Orange Mounting Plate (HS9Z-SP5) R3.3 Drilling Rear Unlocking Button Hole When installing the HS5E-K L (rear unlocking button), provide a rear unlocking button a hole on the HS9Z-SP5. (0) Drilling Mounting Hole -M (3.) ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) (87) 06 -R6. -C3 Material: Anodized aluminum A6063 Weight: Approx. 80g -M Screw 0 to -M Screw Rear Unlocking Button Kit (HS9Z-FL5 ) Hinge + Plate Material: Stainless Steel Button: PA66 0 Rear Unlocking Button Mounting Dimensions or -M Screw ø Ø0 73 Button pressed (unlocked) Button released ø8 Rear Unlocking Button Hole (Note) HS5E-KL (sold separately) Pin: Stainless Steel Total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate: 3 to 53 mm Connection Link Material: Stainless Steel Example: When mounted on a 30 mm frame using the mounting plate above (HS9Z-SP5), select HS9Z-FL5 since the mounting part thickness (X) is 0 (X=0 + 30=0). Screw: Steel With the mounting hole dimension, the rear unlocking button rod does not touch the hole even when the interlock switch moves sideways. 57

58 HS5E-K es with Key Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Status Status Status Status 3 Rear Manual Unlock Door closed Machine ready to operate Door closed Machine cannot be operated Door opened Machine cannot be operated Door closed Machine cannot be operated Press Door Status Press rear unlocking button. (Note) Diagram (Example: HS5E-KVA) 3 LOCK 53 UNLOCK 5 3 LOCK 53 UNLOCK 5 3 LOCK 53 UNLOCK 5 3 LOCK 53 UNLOCK 5 Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Opened Closed (unlocked) Monitor (door closed) - Monitor (door open) 3- HS5E-KVA Monitor (locked) - Monitor (unlocked) 53-5 Monitor (door closed) - Monitor (door closed) - HS5E-KVD Monitor (locked) - Monitor (locked) 5-5 Note: When the operator is confined in a hazardous area, the actuator can be unlocked manually by pressing the rear unlocking button, which should be accessed easily by the operator. The above contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. Monitor circuit: Sends monitoring signals of protective door open/closed status or protective door lock/unlock status. Operation Characteristics (Reference) 0 ( Insertion Position) Approx. 3.3 (Locked Position) Model and Contact Configuration Monitor (door open, NO) Monitor (door closed, NC) Monitor (unlocked, NO) Monitor (locked, NC) Approx. 5.3 Approx. 6.9 Approx. 6. (Travel in mm) : Contacts ON (Closed) : Contacts OFF (Open) The operating characteristics shown in the chart above are of the HS9Z-A5 actuator. For other actuators, add.3 mm. The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters the entry slot of an interlock switch. 58

59 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn the power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welding or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform a risk assessment and establish a safety circuit that satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety and security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a breakdown or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in a location where the human body may come in contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a breakdown. Using the slot plugs supplied with the interlock switch, plug the unused actuator entry slots. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Use proprietary actuators only. Using other actuators may damage the interlock switch. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Loosening the screws may damage the interlock switch. The actuator retention force is,00n. Do not apply a load higher than the rated value. When a higher load is expected, provide an additional system consisting of another interlock switch without lock (such as the HS5D/HS5B interlock switch) or a sensor to detect the door opening and stop the machine. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or take other measures. Although the HS9Z-A5A and HS9Z-A5A actuators (w/ rubber bushings) alleviate the shock when the actuator enters the slot on the interlock switch, make sure that excessive shock is not applied. If the rubber bushings become deformed or cracked, replace with new ones. Do not mount the interlock switch facing down as shown in the figure below. Otherwise, the key may fall off due to shock. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For doors with a small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A53 or HS9Z-A55). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of a hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-A5 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Minimum Radius 70 mm (36.) 90 mm (35) Mounting Hole When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Minimum Radius 30 mm 60 mm (.5) (0.3) (6) Mounting Hole HS9Z-A5A (with rubber bushings) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Minimum Radius Centers mm : 0 mm Centers 0 mm: 70 mm (36.) 0 mm (35) (3) Mounting Hole When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Centers mm: 30 mm Centers 0 mm: 30 mm 60 mm () Mounting Hole (3) (8.) (7) Incorrect Orientation 59

60 HS5E-K es with Key Instructions Angle Adjustment (vertical/horizontal) Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing on page 55). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not move. When using the HS9Z-A53 Angle Adjustable (vertical) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80 mm Mounting Examples Mount the interlocks switch to a fixed machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both interlock switch and actuator on the hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Application of Sliding Doors Door HS9Z-A5 HS5E-K Latch Door Stop Application of Hinged Doors HS9Z-SH5 Sliding HS9Z-A5 Door 50 mm Door Hinge (36.) Mounting Hole (38) 80 mm Door Hinge (56.5) Mounting Hole When using the HS9Z-A55 Angle Adjustable (vertical/ horizontal) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 70 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Horizontal Swing Vertical Swing (68) HS5E-K Install the interlock switch on the immovable part of the door. Install the actuator on the movable part of the door. Installing the Head Do not use plastic and metallic heads of HS5D/HS5B interlock switches on the HS5E-K. Be sure to use HS5E metallic heads. The metal heads of the HS5E, HS5D, and HS5B look similar. When using these interlock switches adjacently, ensure that the heads are not interchanged. HS5D/HS5B Plastic Head Plastic Color: red, black or gray HS5E Metallic Head Metallic Head Metal Color: Silver Color: Gray or red Color: Black When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface Horizontal Swing 50 mm 70 mm (36.) 50 mm Vertical Swing 70 mm Door Hinge (36.) Mounting Hole (38) Mounting Hole (58) * The metal head can be distinguished easily by the color of the plastic. Rotating the head The head can be rotated by removing the four screws from the corners of the head and reinstalling the head in the desired orientation. Before wiring the HS5E-K, replace the head. Before replacing the head, turn the manual unlock to the UNLOCK position using the manual unlock key. When reinstalling the head, make sure that no foreign object enters the interlock switch. Tighten the screws tightly, without leaving a space between the head and body, otherwise the interlock switch may malfunction. (Recommended tightening torque: 0.9 to. N m) Factory Setting Head can be rotated (55.5) (55.5) LOCK UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK 60

61 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Instructions Head Removal Detection ry Only the lock monitor circuit - turns off (open) when the head is removed, such as when the head is rotated. The other monitor circuit 5-5 turns ON (close). Be sure to connect the lock monitor circuit (-) to a safety circuit. When connecting the HS5E-K to a safety circuit, connect the door monitor circuits (-) and the lock monitor circuits (- ) in series. (GS-ET-9) When rotating the head, make sure that the interlock switch is not wired or that the key position is in the UN- LOCK position. Key Follow the instructions below to avoid operating failures and damage. Insert the key completely. Do not remove or insert the key while turning the key. Other than the standard key number (500), 5 types of key numbers are available. Use a key with the same number as the number on the cylinder. Do not apply excessive force when turning the key. Otherwise operating failures and damage may occur. LOCK UNLOCK Do not turn the key to the LOCK side while the actuator is removed (door open). Otherwise, operating failures and breakdowns may occur. Safety Precautions After installing the rear unlocking button, apply Loctite to the screw so that the screw dose not become loose. The button is made of glass-reinforced PA66 (66 nylon). The screw is made of iron. Take the compatibility of the plastic material and Loctite into consideration. Mounting the Rear Unlocking Button Kit. Install a connecting rod onto the push rod on the HS5E-K rear unlocking button interlock switch (HS5E-K L, sold separately). Push Rod. A pin is attached to the connecting rod. Insert the pin into the hole in the push rod, using pliers. 3. Pull the connection rod from the hole in the mounting frame, and turn the button operating pin to the horizontal position. Connection Rod Pull Correct Connecting Rod Connection Rod Orientation Incorrect Safety Precautions Ensure that the connecting rod is pulled out completely and it is horizontal to the interlock switch, otherwise the unlocking button cannot be installed. Note: Frame or panel must be supplied by the user. For the mounting hole layout of interlock switches, see page 57. When using the mounting plate HS9Z-SP5, provide a hole for the connecting rod in the plate according to the mounting plate mounting hole layout shown on page 57.. Install the unlocking button on the connecting rod by fitting the pin to the grooves on the back of the button, and fasten the base plate on the mounting frame using the screws. 5. After fastening the screws, check if locking and unlocking operations can be performed. Pin HS5E-K L Interlock Switch LOCK UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK Button Groove Unlocking Button Do not turn the key to LOCK while the actuator is removed. Installing the Rear Unlocking Button (HS5E- K L) After installing the interlock switch on the panel, place the rear unlocking button (supplied with the switch) on the push rod on the back of the interlock switch, and fasten the button using the screw supplied with the switch. Rear unlocking buttons can be installed alone when the total thickness of mounting frame and panel is 6 mm or less. When the total thickness of mounting frame, panel, and mounting plate is 3 to 53 mm, use the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z-FL53, HS9Z-FL5, or HS9Z-FL55) sold separately. Button Operating Pin Screw Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button kit in the correct direction as shown below. Do not install the kit in incorrect directions, otherwise a malfunction may occur. Panel Push Rod Rear Unlocking Button M3 Sems Screw HS5E-K L Correct Orientation Incorrect Orientation Do not apply strong force, exceeding 00 m/s, to the interlock switch while the rear unlocking button is not pressed, otherwise a malfunction may occur. 6

62 HS5E-K es with Key Instructions Manual Unlocking using the Rear Unlocking Button The rear unlocking button is used by the operator confined in a hazardous area for emergency escape. When installing the HS9Z-A5A and HS9Z-A5A actuators, use the washer (supplied with the actuator) on the hinged door, and mount tightly using two M screws. M Screw Washer Rubber Bushing Unlock Rear Unlocking Button Unlock Rear Unlocking Button Kit How to operate When the rear unlocking button is pressed, the interlock switch is unlocked and the door can be opened. To lock the interlock switch, pull back the button. When the button remains pressed, the interlock switch cannot be locked even if the door is closed, and the main circuit remains open. Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button in a place where only the operator inside the hazardous area can use it. Do not install the button in a place where an operator outside the hazardous area can use it, otherwise the interlock switch may be unlocked during usual machine operation, causing danger. Operate the rear unlocking button by hand only. Do not operate using a tool or with excessive force. Do not apply force to the button from the direction other than the proper direction, otherwise the button will be damaged. Hinged Door M Screw Hole Note: Choose mounting centers of either mm or 0 mm. Recommended Tightening Torque for Mounting Screws HS5E-K interlock switch:.8 to. N m (four M screws) (Note) Rear unlocking button: 0.5 to 0.7 N m Rear unlocking button kit:.8 to 5. N m (M5 Screw) s HS9Z-A5:.8 to. N m (two M screws) (Note) HS9Z-A5: 0.8 to. N m (two M Phillips screws) HS9Z-A5A/A5A:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) (Note) HS9Z-A53:.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) (Note) HS9Z-A55:.0 to.5 N m (two M screws) (Note) Note: The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. Mounting bolts must be provided by the users. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and actuator are installed in a secure manner, for example using special screws or welding the screws. 6

63 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Instructions Cables Do not fasten or loosen the gland at the bottom of the interlock switch. When bending the cable during wiring, make sure that the cable radius is kept at 30 mm minimum. When wiring, make sure that water or oil does not enter the cable. Do not open the lid of the interlock switch. Otherwise the interlock switch will be damaged. Gland Lid Minimum Radius 30 mm (8) Wire Identification Wires can be identified by color and white line printed on the wire. Wires whose colors are white, black, gray and gray/white cannot be used. No. Insulation No. Insulation No. Insulation No. Insulation White Blue 7 Blue/White 0 Pink/White Black 5 Brown/White 8 Orange/White Gray 3 Brown 6 Orange 9 Pink Gray/White Insulation Jacket Code Identification codes can be identified by the insulation color in each contact configuration. The following table shows the identification of circuit numbers. When wiring, cut unnecessary wires such as the dummy insulation (white) and any unused wires. Model Contact Configuration Door Monitor LOCK UNLOCK HS5E-KVA Blue Orange 3 Blue/White Pink Orange/White Brown Pink/White 53 5Brown/White HS5E-KVD Blue Orange Blue/White Pink Orange/White Brown 5 Pink/White 5Brown/White The contact configuration shows the status where the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. 63

64 HS5E-K es with Key Logic using FSA Safety Controller Example : Hostage control (one robot) Turn the key selector switch to Teach Mode and remove the key. Unlock HS5E-K using the same key, then remove the key and open the door to enter. Gripping the enabling switch in the enabling position enables the robot to operate. FSA-CS LOGIC3A Emergency Stop Switch Emergency Stop Switch Safety Input 5 T0, X0, T, X Safety Input 6 T, X, T3, X3 Dual Channel Direct Opening Dual Channel Direct Opening & Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold function Trigger HEG Grip Switch HW Series Key Selector Switch (Pin Tumber Type) Safety Input T, X, T3, X3 Safety Input T0, X0, X HS5E-K Safety Input 3 Key Interlock T, X, T5, X5 Switch Safety Input T6, X6, T7, X7 Start Input X6 Dual Channel Dependent Mode Select II Dual Channel Dependent Dual Channel Dependent Monitor Input Teach Mode Auto Mode & & Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold function Trigger Self-hold function circuit 3 Hold Self-hold function Trigger >= & Safety Output Y0 Hold Y OSSD EDM Safety Output Y Hold OSSD Y3 with Off-delay EDM Start Input X7 Monitor Input Control Control Start External Device Monitor T, X External Device Monitor T5, X5 EDM EDM External Device Monitor External Device Monitor 6

65 HS5E-K HS5E-K es with Key Example : Partial Mode Change (Multiple Robots) Three FSA safety controllers are required for two robots and four FSA safety controllers for three robots. Turn the key selector switch of the first robot (logic no. 03) to Teach Mode and remove the key. Unlock the HS5E-K interlock switch using the same key and open the door to enter. Using the same key, Turn the key selector switches of the second (logic No. 3b) or subsequent robots to be operated to Teach Mode. Gripping the enabling switch in the enabling position enables the robot to operate. Note : Teaching is possible with one robot at a time. Teaching multiple robots is not possible at the same time. Note : The emergency stop switch connected to the first FSA safety controller is effective for all robots. Note 3: Connect safety outputs Y and Y3 (solid state outputs) of the first FSA safety controller to the RFV force guided relay (K, K), and connect its NO contact to the safety output Y0, Y of the second and the subsequent FSA safety controllers. Connect NC contact to the EDM input of the first FSA safety controller. The required number of RFV (K, K): For two robots: NONC For three robots: 3NONC For four robots: NONC Note : The emergency stop switch connected to the second and subsequent FSA safety controllers are effective for the robot only. Note 5: Connect the NC contacts of K3 and K to EDM input of the second FSA safety controller. Connect the NC contacts of K5 and K6 to the EDM input of the third FSA safety controller. Select force guided relays for K3, K, K5 and K6 according to the operation control circuits of the robots. Emergency Stop Switch HW series Key Selector Switch (pin tumbler key) HS5E-K Key Interlock Switch FSA-CS LOGIC03 Dual Channel Dependent Open Open Mode Select II Dual Channel Direct Opening Monitor Input Teach Mode Auto Mode & & Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold Function Trigger Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold Function Trigger Self-hold function circuit 3 Hold Self-hold Function Trigger >= & Hold OSSD with off-delay EDM Y0 Y Hold OSSD with off-delay EDM Y Y3 K K Monitor Input EDM External Device Monitor Emergency Stop Switch HEG Grip Switch HW series Key Selector Switch (pin tumbler key) FSA-CS LOGIC 3b (inside the guard) Self-hold function circuit Dual Channel Direct Opening Hold Self-hold Function Dual Channel Dependent Trigger Mode Select Dual Channel Safety Monitor Input Teach Mode Auto Mode & & Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold Function Trigger Self-hold function circuit 3 Hold Self-hold Function Trigger >= & Hold OSSD EDM Y0 Y K K K3 K Monitor Input Control Control Start EDM External Device Monitor Emergency Stop Switch HEG Grip Switch HW series Key Selector Switch (pin tumbler key) FSA-CS LOGIC 3b (inside the guard) Self-hold function circuit Dual Channel Direct Opening Hold Self-hold Dual Channel Function Dependent Trigger Mode Select Dual Channel Safety Monitor Input Teach Mode Auto Mode & & Self-hold function circuit Hold Self-hold Function Trigger Self-hold function circuit 3 Hold Self-hold Function Trigger >= & Hold OSSD EDM Y0 Y K K K5 K6 Monitor Input Control Control Start EDM External Device Monitor K to K6: RFV force guided relay 65

66 HS5 Series Door Handle Door Handle Configuration es Switch Cover Unit HS5E-*L**-G Rear Unlocking Button HS5E-K*L Rear Unlocking Button HS5D-*Z Metal Head HS5B-**Z Metal Head HS9Z-DH5C Selection Chart Mounting Panel Thickness X Door Size Large With Lock Rear Unlocking Required X m 0 X 30mm 30 < X 0mm 0 < X 50mm Without Lock X 70mm Small With Lock Without Lock 66

67 HS5 HS5 Series Door Handle Handle Unit Right-hand Door Left-hand Door Accessories Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5RH HS9Z-DH5LH HS9Z-FL53 HS9Z-FL5 HS9Z-FL55 HS9Z-DH5B Handle Unit Switch Cover Unit Accessories Right-hand Door HS9Z-DH5RH Left-hand Door HS9Z-DH5LH Right-hand Door HS9Z-DH5RH Left-hand Door HS9Z-DH5LH Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL53 HS5E- L (Rear Unlocking Button) Right-hand Door HS9Z-DH5RH Left-hand Door HS9Z-DH5LH HS9Z-DH5C Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL5 Right-hand Door Left-hand Door HS9Z-DH5RH HS9Z-DH5LH Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL55 HS5E-K L (Rear Unlocking Button) Right-hand Door HS9Z-DH5RH Left-hand Door HS9Z-DH5LH HS5D/HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5B HS5D- Z HS5B- Z (Metal Head) HS5E HS5E-K (All model) Sliding HS9Z-SH5 HS5D- Z HS5B- Z (Metal Head) 67

68 HS5 Series Door Handle Easy and secure operation. Rattling doors can be locked smoothly and securely. A door can be locked with an actuator by pushing and turning the handle. Padlock tab is provided to ensure operator safety. Interlock switch with or without solenoid lock can be installed. LED shows solenoid status (when using HS5E-*L**-G). Specifications Applicable Interlock Switch Operating Temperature Mechanical Durability Applicable Shackle Diameter of Padlock Withstand Load of Padlock Tab Handle Operation Angle Weight HS5D Metal Head Interlock witch (Note ) HS5B Metal Head (Note ) HS5E Rear Unlocking Button with Solenoid (Note 3) HS5E-K Rear Unlocking Button with Key (Note ) 5 to +70 C (no freezing) 00,000 operations minimum ø6 to 7.5 mm 30N maximum 77 (removed position inserted position) HS9Z-DH5LH/RH: 000g HS9Z-DH5C: 900g HS9Z-DH5B: 30g Note : HS5D-**ZRN* Note : HS5B-**ZB, HS5B-**ZBM Note 3: HS5E-*L**-G Note : HS5E-K**0L**-**** Interlock switch is not supplied with the actuator and must be ordered separately. Description Part No. Remarks Handle Unit For right-hand door HS9Z-DH5RH For left-hand door HS9Z-DH5LH Choose according to the required opening side. Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C Used for installing the interlock switch inside. HS5D/HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5B Contains a mounting plate and two spacers. HS9Z-FL53 Contains a button Mounting panel thickness (X): 0 X 30 mm (Note ) Rear Unlocking Button Kit (Note ) HS9Z-FL5 with base plate and a Mounting panel thickness (X): 30 < X 0 mm (Note ) HS9Z-FL55 connecting rod Mounting panel thickness (X): 0 < X 50 mm (Note ) Note : Use the kit in combination with the HS5E-*L**-G rear unlocking button interlock switch. Note : Mounting panel is a frame or a panel. Parts Description Handle Unit (for right-hand door) Padlock Knob Rear Unlocking Button Kit Blind Cap Rear Handle (yellow) Front Handle (black) Switch Cover Unit Manual Unlock Label Rear Unlocking Button Front View Rear View 68

69 HS5 Dimensions HS5 Series Door Handle HS9Z-DH5RH (right-hand door) and HS5E-*L**-G with Solenoid SUS Rear Unlocking Button Connecting Rod (SUS) ø0. Diecast Aluminum (plated) Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (yellow) Handle Link Shaft 8 (free-cutting steel) Legend ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ Description Right-hand Door Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5RH Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL5* HS5E-*L**-G to Rear Handle Diecast Aluminum (diecast aluminum) (plated) (silver) (yellow) Handle Link Shaft 8 (free-cutting steel) SUS Rear Unlocking Button Connecting Rod (SUS) ø0. 9 Unlocked: 8 Locked: to Mounting Panel Thickness: 0 to 0 Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (black) Diecast Aluminum (plated) (silver) Polyacetal (black) PADLOCK Mounting Panel Thickness: 0 to Diecast Aluminum (plated) Front Handle (diecast aluminum) (black) Polyacetal (black) Unlocked: 8 Locked: 8 PADLOCK LOCK UNLCOK Rear Unlocking Button (Nylon 66) (red) SUS HS9Z-DH5LH (left-hand door) and HS5E-*L**-G with Solenoid Legend ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ Description Left-hand Door Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5LH Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C Rear Unlocking Button Kit HS9Z-FL5* HS5E-*L**-G 3 LOCK UNLOCK 7 3 Rear Unlocking Button (Nylon 66) (red) SUS All dimensions in mm. 69

70 LOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK HS5 Series Door Handle HS9Z-DH5RH (right-hand door) and HS5D-**Z/HS5B-**Z 9.8 Diecast Aluminum (plated) (silver) SUS Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (yellow) Handle Link Shaft 8 (free-cutting steel) 35 Legend ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ Description Right-hand Door Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5RH Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5B HS5D-**Z/HS5B-**Z Polyacetal (black) Diecast Aluminum (plated) (silver) 7 to Front Handle (diecast aluminum) (black) Mounting Panel Thickness: 70 mm or less Unlocked: 8 Locked: (9.5) PADLOCK SUS 3 HS9Z-DH5LH (left-hand door) and HS5D-**Z/HS5B-**Z Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (yellow) Handle Link Shaft 8 (free-cutting steel) Diecast Aluminum (plated) (silver) SUS Legend ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ Description Left-hand Door Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5LH Switch Cover Unit HS9Z-DH5C HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5B HS5D-**Z/HS5B-**Z Mounting Panel Thickness: 70 mm or less Unlocked: 8 Locked: 8 Rear Handle (diecast aluminum) (black) Diecast Aluminum (plated) (silver) 73 7 to Polyacetal (black) (9.5) PADLOCK 0 LOCK SUS 3 All dimensions in mm. 70

71 UNLOCK HS5 HS5 Series Door Handle Panel Cut-out HS9Z-DH5RH right-hand door handle unit When using the HS5E- L -G on the mounting panel of 3 mm or less in thickness (use the rear unlocking button). 7 to 9 36 to to 6 3 to 0 8 to (0) (7.5) (7 to 9) (6) Mounting Position Tolerance 56 Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) 6-M Rear Handle Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) 35 -M5 0.8 Reference 3 Door gap <Front View> Door gap <Rear View> 7 to 9 Reference When using the HS5E- L -G on the mounting panel of 0 to 0 mm in thickness. Use the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z-FL5 ). In the figure shown on the right, 0mm frame is used to 6 6 to to to (0) 3 to 0 (7.5) 35 (7 to 9) (6) to 8 PADLOCK LOCK Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) Rear Handle Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) (6)-M5 (3 to ) 0 0 Door Gap (6)-M5 <Front View> 0 0 Door Gap <Rear View> HS9Z-DH5LH left-hand door handle unit When using the HS5E- L -G on the mounting panel of 3 mm or less in thickness (use the rear unlocking button). 0 8 to to 9 36 to 6 (7 to 9) (7.5) 6 to 6 (6) 3 to (0) Rear Handle Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) M M5 Door gap <Front View> <Rear View> Door gap When using the HS5E- L -G on the mounting panel of 0 to 0 mm in thickness. Use the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z-FL5 ). In the figure shown on the right, 0mm frame is used Rear Handle Hole ø6 to 30 (Note ) 8 to to 9 36 to 6 6 to Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) to 8 (3 to ) (7 to 9) (6) (7.5) 35 3 to 0 (0) (6)-M5 Note : Required when using the HS5E-*L-**-G. Not required when using the HS5D-**Z or HS5B-**Z (without locking function) (70mmthick is necessary for mounting panel). Note : Ensure that the hole in the mounting panel does not interfere with the rear handle shaft. (6)-M5 0 Door gap 0 Rear Unlocking Button Hole ø to 30 (Note ) <Front View> 0 Door gap 0 <Rear View> All dimensions in mm. 7

72 HS5 Series Door Handle Dimensions Rear Unlocking Button Kit (HS9Z-FL53/HS9Z-FL5/HS9Z-FL55) (Use with the HS5E-*L**-G ) Hinge + Plate (SUS) 0 Rear Unlocking Button Kit Mounting Hole Layout M5 Screws ø0. ø HS5E-*L**-G (sold separetely) Thickness of Mounting Bracket (3) Pin (SUS) Button pressed (unlocked) Button unpressed Total thickness of mounting panel: 0 to ø to 30 Rear Unlocking Button Hole to 30 When installing using two mounting screws, install one on top and the other on bottom. If both mounting screws are installed either on top or bottom only, the rear unlocking button kit cannot be installed securely, resulting in failure. Connecting Rod (SUS) Screws (iron) HS5D/HS5B Installation Kit (HS9Z-DH5B) ø. A6063 Anonized -R5 Note: The illustration kit contains the aluminum mounting plate shown above and two spacers. All dimensions in mm. 7

73 HS5 HS5 Series Door Handle Instructions The door handle actuator can be used with the HS5D-**Z, HS5B-**Z (metal head), and HS5E-*L**-G (rear unlocking button) only. Do not use with other interlock switches. When using the door handle actuator in the safety-related part of the system, make sure of proper operation while observing the safety standards and regulations of the relevant country or region where the actual machine/system is used. Also, perform a risk assessment before operation. Read the instruction sheet of interlock switch before installing the door handle actuator. Install the switch cover unit and handle unit on the outside of the door. Do not install them inside the door, otherwise the door cannot be opened or closed by the operator, affecting the operation and causing danger to the operator. Install the door handle actuator in the direction as shown on the right, so that the cable faces downward. Do not install in any other direction, otherwise malfunction will be caused. Do not modify or disassemble the door handle actuator. Cable Padlocking When padlocking the HS9Z-DH5, lift the Padlock Tab knob on the front of the HS9Z-DH5. A tab will appear. Install padlock(s) or a hasp on Padlock Knob the tab. Make sure that the total load by the padlocks and hasp does not exceed 30N. Otherwise the door handle actuator will become deformed or damaged. The applicable shackle diameter of padlock is ø6.0 to 7.5 mm. Installation Check wether the following parts are included. Unit Part Quantity Mounting Bracket Switch Cover Switch Cover Unit Blind Cap HS9Z-DH5C Screw A * Screw B * Screw C Cover Front Handle (black) Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5RH HS9Z-DH5LH HS5B Installation Kit HS9Z-DH5B Rear handle (yellow) Rear handle Shaft Rear handle Plate Rear handle Base Screw D * Screw E Mounting Plate Spacer * Screws A and B are loosely attached to the switch cover. Screws D are loosely attached to the handles. Installing the Switch Cover Unit (HS9Z-DH5C). Remove one Screw A and two Screws B from the switch cover and remove the switch cover from the mounting bracket. Switch Cover Screw A Mounting Bracket Shackle Diameter Manual Unlocking When using the HS5E- *L**-G interlock switch, attach the manual unlock label on the front of the switch cover unit. For manual unlocking, refer to the specifications for the HS5E interlock switch with solenoid. LOCK UNLOCK Normal Status LOCK UNLOCK Unlocked Status Handle Operation Push the handle, and turn the handle to insert the actuator. Handle Operation ➀ Push the handle LOCK UNLOCK ➁ Turn the handle Manual Unlock Label. [HS5E-*L**-G ] Using four Screws C, install the interlock switch on the mounting bracket (panel thickness 3 mm or less). When installing on a mounting panel (X) of 0 X 50 mm, install the connecting rod onto the push Screws B rod and press the pin into the hole in the push rod as described in the Installing the Rear Unlocking Button Kit on page 7, before installing the switch on the mounting bracket. [HS5D-**Z and HS5B-**Z ] Install the interlock switch using the HS5B Installation Kit (HS9Z-DH5B) and two Screws C. Screw C HS5E- L -G Spacers Screws C HS5D- Z Mounting Plate HS5B- Z Note: Do not force to turn the handle without pushing in the handle, otherwise damage will occur. Do not close the door when the actuator is in the locked status, otherwise the actuator will hit the door, resulting in deformation or damage. When turning the handle, make sure that your hands or fingers are not caught by the door. 3. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the blind cap. To do so, attach the tab on one end to the switch cover, and bending the blind cap, attach the other end on the switch cover.. Install the switch cover on the mounting plate using one Screw A and two Screws B. Inside Blind Cap Switch Cover Outside Blind Cap Screw A Screws B 73

74 LOCK UNLOCK HS5 Series Door Handle Instructions 5. Install the switch cover unit on the mounting frame and panel. Mounting screws or nuts are not supplied and must be provided by the user. 7. Tighten Screw D attached to the handle using a hexagonal wrench (size:.5). Apply Loctite to the screw so that it does not become loose. Screw D Mounting Screws Nuts Mounting holes required in the frame. See Dimensions on page 7. Installing the rear unlocking button When the total thickness of mounting panel is 3.0 mm or less: Install the rear unlocking button on the rod on the back of the switch. For details, see the instruction sheet for the HS5E. When the total thickness of mounting frame or panel is 0 mm or more: Install the rear unlocking button kit (HS9Z- FL5 ) sold separately. For installation, see the instruction sheet for the HS9Z-FL5. Installing the Handle Unit HS9Z-DH5RH. Install the front handle (black) on the shaft on the actuator cover as shown below. Handle Position Locked 8. Turn the handle to the locked position, and insert the rear handle shaft into the actuator cover. The rear handle should be in the locked position. 9. While adjusting to ensure smooth operation of the rear handle, fasten the rear handle unit on the mounting frame and panel. * Install the HS9Z-DH5LH in a similar fashion as the HS9Z- DH5RH. Note that the handle direction becomes opposite. Nuts Mounting Screws Locked Unlocked * Mounting screws and nuts are not supplied and must be provided by the user. Mounting Reference Position The mounting reference position and allowable mounting range are as shown below. Shaft Unlocked 0.8 Reference Position. Tighten Screw D attached to the handle using a hexagonal wrench (size:.5). Apply Loctite to the screw so that it does not become loose. 3. Install the handle unit on the mounting frame and panel, aligning the handle unit and switch cover unit as illustrated under Mounting Reference Position. Mounting screws and nuts are not supplied and must be provided by the user. Mounting Screws Screw D. Cut the rear handle shaft according to the thickness of the mounting frame and panel. Nuts Use the square dot pattern as a guide of the allowable mounting range. LOCK UNLOCK 3 7 to 9 Reference Position Mounting panel thickness (X) 0 < X 0mm: Cut at 0 < X 0mm: Cut at 0 < X 30mm: Cut at 30 < X 0mm: Cut at 0 < X 50mm: Cut at 50 < X 60mm: Cut at 60 < X 70mm: No cut 5. Align the rear handle plate, rear handle shaft, and the rear handle base as shown below, and fasten them using two Screws E. Apply Loctite to the screws so that they do not become loose. Shaft Positioning Pin Rear Handle Shaft Rear Handle Plate Screw E Rear Handle Base Screw E Installing the Rear Unlocking Button Kit. Install the connecting rod onto the push rod on the HS5E-*L**-G rear unlocking button interlock switch.. A pin is attached to the connecting rod. Using pliers, press the pin into the hole in the push rod. 3. Pull out the connecting rod from the hole in the mounting frame, and turn the button operating pin to the horizontal position. Connecting Rod Push Rod Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Orientation HS5E- L- -G Pin 6. Install the rear handle (yellow) on the rear handle shaft. Pull Correct Incorrect 7

75 HS5 HS5 Series Door Handle Instructions Safety Precautions Ensure that the connecting rod is pulled out completely and it is horizontal to the interlock switch, otherwise the unlocking button cannot be installed. Frame or panel must be supplied by the user. Manual Unlocking Using the Rear Unlocking Button The rear unlocking button is used by the operator confined in a hazardous area for emergent escape.. Install the unlocking button on the connecting rod by fitting the pin to the grooves on the back of the button, and fasten the base plate on the mounting frame using the screws. Button Groove Unlocking Button Base Plate Mounting Frame Unlock Rear Unlocking Button Unlock Rear Unlocking Button Kit Button Operating Pin Screw 5. After tightening the mounting screws to a torque of.8 to 5. N m, check if locking and unlocking operations can be performed. Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button kit in the correct direction as shown below. Do not install the kit in incorrect directions, otherwise malfunction will be caused. Correct Incorrect Do not apply strong force exceeding 00 m/s to the rear unlocking button kit, otherwise malfunction will be caused. How to operate When the rear unlocking button is pressed, the interlock switch is unlocked and the door can be opened. To lock the interlock switch, pull back the button. While the button remains pressed, the interlock switch cannot be locked even if the door is closed, and the main circuit remains open. Safety Precautions Install the rear unlocking button in the place where only the operator inside the hazardous area can use it. Do not install the button in the place which can be reached by an operator outside the hazardous area, otherwise the interlock switch may be unlocked during machine operation, causing danger. Operate the rear unlocking button by hand only. Do not operate using a tool or with excessive force. Do not apply force to the button from the direction other than the proper direction, otherwise the button will be damaged. Recommended Tightening Torque Recommended Screw Tightening Torque HS9Z-DH5C Switch Cover Unit One Screw A (M) and two Screws B (M5) to install the switch cover on the mounting.0 to. N m bracket Four Screws C (M) to install the interlock.5 to.8 N m switch on the mounting bracket Three M5 screws to install the switch cover unit on the mounting frame and panel (not.5 to 5.0 N m supplied and must be provided by the user) HS9Z-DH5*H Handle Unit One Screw D (M5) to fasten handle.5 to 3.0 N m Two Screws E (M5) to install the rear handle.5 to 5.0 N m base on the rear handle plate Two M5 screws each to install the front and rear handles on the mounting frame and panel.5 to 5.0 N m (not supplied and must be provided by the user) Note: The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. 75

76 HS5 Series Sliding Sliding actuators allow for easy installation and adjustment. Angle adjustment is not required, enabling easy positioning. Installation is possible both vertically and horizontally, and also on any type of doors. Can be used on the HS5D/HS5B metal head and HS5E/ HS5E-K interlock switches. Safety measures can be provided easily on existing facilities. Sliding Description HS5 Series Sliding Part No. HS9Z-SH5 Note: HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switches are not supplied with the sliding actuators and must be ordered separately. Dimensions Specifications HS5D-**Z/HS5B-**Z Metal Head Interlock Switches Applicable Model HS5E es HS5E-K es with key Weight 5g Mechanical Durability 00,000 operations minimum Operation Stroke 0 mm Direct Opening Force Mounting Hole Layout HS5D: 60N min imum HS5B: 80N minimum HS5E: 90N minimum HS5E-K: 80N minimum R ø5. 6-M5 Screws (0) All dimensions in mm. (SUS) Thickness:.5 6 Cover (SUS) 76

77 HS5 HS5 Series Sliding Installation When using with HS5S-**Z/HS5B-**Z interlock switch 0 to Two Oblong Mounting Holes When using with HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switch 0 to Two Oblong Mounting Holes Two Round Mounting Holes 3 HS5B HS5E Interlock Switch 5-0 Instructions Fasten the actuator cover on at least two oblong holes using mounting screws. Operating Instructions When using the sliding actuator in a safety-related part of the system, make sure of proper operation while observing the safety standards and regulations of the relevant country or region where the actual machine/system is used. Also, perform a risk assessment before operation. Read the instruction sheet of the interlock switch carefully before installation or operation. The actuator has projections on the end. Take care not to injure hands. Regardless of door types, do not use the sliding actuator as a door stop. When the actuator is inserted to an interlock switch in the different direction from the open/close direction of the door, do not open the door with excessive force, otherwise failure or damage will be caused. When an operator enters the hazardous zone, take a safety measure such as using padlock hasp HS9Z-PH5 so that the operator is not trapped inside and the machine is not operated while the operator is in the hazardous zone. Do not install the sliding actuator as shown below, otherwise the actuator may be removed from the interlock switch due to shocks. Thickness Adjustment Plate (to be provided by the user) 0 Recommended thickness: 5- mm Fasten the actuator cover on at least two rectangular holes and two round mounting holes using mounting screws. The thickness adjustment plate requires mounting holes. When installing the sliding actuator over the interlock switch as shown below, do not apply a shock exceeding 00 m/s to the actuator, otherwise the actuator may be inserted to the interlock switch and cause unintended machine operation. Use the sliding actuator with HS5D/ HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switches only. Do not use with other products. Do not modify or disassemble the sliding actuator. Adjustment. Mounting Reference Position The mounting reference position of sliding actuator is shown below. Mounting Position Tolerance: ±.5 Mounring Reference 6.7 Interlock Switch HS5D/HS5B +3 (Mounting position tolerance - ) HS9Z-SH5. Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws M5 screws for mounting the sliding actuator:.5 to 5.5 N m M screws for mounting the interlock switch:.8 to. N m Note: The above recommended tightening torque of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. Ensure to slide the sliding actuator completely. Incomplete insertion of the actuator may cause unstable contact operation of the interlock switch. Also, door may not be opened, damaging the actuator. Do not close the door when the actuator is slid out of the cover, otherwise the actuator may damaged. When using the sliding actuator, take care so that fingers or hands are not caught between the actuator and interlock switch. 77

78 HS5 Series Plug Allows HS5 series interlock switches to be used as interlock plug units. By chaining a plug actuator to a guard door for use with the HS5 series interlock switches, the open/close status of a guard door can be detected. Unlike interlock plugs, the plug actuators can be removed/ installed while power is applied. Defeating-prevention structure is provided within the HS5 series interlock switches. Selection of with or without locking function is possible by select ing HS5 series interlock switches. Contact configuration of the HS5 series interlock switches remains the same. IP67 protection of the HS5 series interlock switches remains the same. Usage of the HS9Z-PH5 padlock hasps allows the interlock plug to be used as a hostage control unit. Plug Description Part No. HS5 series Plug HS9Z-A5P Note: The HS5B/HS5E interlock switches are ordered separately. Specifications Applicable Model Weight (approx) HS5D/HS5B Miniature Interlock Switches HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid HS5E-K es with Key HS5L es with Solenoid 35g Note: Refer to the specifications of each interlock switch. Dimensions When used with the HS5D/HS5B interlock switch When using with the HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switch Handle: Aluminum Thickness: Rivet: Stainless Steel 6 3 Spacer: Steel Handle: Aluminum Thickness: Rivet: Stainless Steel 6 3 Spacer: Steel 0 36 Washer: Steel Area : Stainless Steel Thickness:.5 Area Coating: Orange 36 Washer: Steel Area 5 0 Thickness:.5 Area Coating: Orange 6.5 (36.) (36.) R6 (9) R6 (30) HS5D/HS5B (30) (06) (6) HS5E/HS5E-K (35) (0) (6.3) All dimensions in mm. 78

79 HS5 HS5 Series Plug Precautions for Installation When using the HS9Z-A5P for safety-related equipment in a control system, refer to the safety standards and regulations in each country to make sure of correct operation. Also, perform a risk assessment to ensure safety before starting operation. Read the instruction sheet of the interlock switch to be used. Note the projections on the HS9Z-A5P to prevent injury. Regardless of door types, do not use the HS9Z-A5P as a door lock. Install a separate lock such as a metal latch. When the direction to insert the HS9Z-A5P into the interlock switch is different from the opening/closing direction of the door, do not open the door while the HS9Z-A5P remains in the interlock switch. Do not insert the HS9Z-A5P from the lower side as shown in the following figure. Otherwise the HS9Z-A5P may fall because of vibration. When inserting the HS9Z-A5P into a part of the door The thickness of a door to insert the HS9Z-A5P depends upon the insertion direction as shown in the following figure. When placing a thicker objects, the HS9Z-A5P cannot enter sufficiently, causing malfunction of the interlock switch. 0 mm max. HS9Z-A5P 0 mm max. HS5D/HS5B.5 mm max. 7 mm max. The HS9Z-A5P is used for HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K/HS5L interlock switches only. Do not use the HS9Z-A5P with other products. Do not modify or disassemble the HS9Z-A5P. When linking the HS9Z-A5P to the door with a chain HS9Z-A5P HS5E/HS5E-K 0 mm max. Refer to the standard (ISO385 through 385) for safety distances and safety gaps. When an operator enters the danger zone, take measures such as using a Padlock Hasp (HS9Z-PH5) so that the operator is not trapped, and the machine can not be started by mistake. Connect the chain to the handle of the HS9Z-A5P and the door firmly. Use a chain which has welded joints and does not break apart easily. Stop using the interlock device when the chain breaks. Give proper slack to the chain, and do not apply excessive force to the HS9Z-A5P. Determine the proper length of the chain so that the door does not open wide and that the danger zone can not be accessed by the operator. Refer to the following standards for safety distances and safety gaps. ISO3857 (Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs) ISO385 (Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body.) When an operator enters the danger zone, take measures such as using a Padlock Hasp (HS9Z-PH5) so that the operator is not trapped, and the machine can not be started by mistake. When using the HS9Z-A5P as a hostage key Do not use two or more HS9Z-A5P for one interlock switch. Treat the HS9Z-A5P with care, and ensure that the HS9Z-A5P is not inserted into other interlock switches. When an operator enters the danger zone, take measures such as using a Padlock Hasp (HS9Z-PH5) so that the operator is not trapped, and the machine can not be started by mistake. 79

80 HS5 Series Padlock Hasp Padlock hasps prevent unauthorized insertion of actuators. Ideal to prevent machines from operating when two or more oper ators are inside the danger zone. Accommodates up to four padlocks when the hasp is installed on the interlock switch. By providing each operator with a padlock to install on the hasp before entering the danger zone, the machine can not restart until all operators have left the zone and removed their padlocks (use a hasp for five or more operators). Note: Use of padlocks to ensure safety requires strict observance of opening rules. Safety cannot be ensured if the rules are neglected, such as failing to install the padlocks. Padlock Hasp Description Part No. HS5 Series Padlock Hasp HS9Z-PH5 Note: The HS5B/HS5E interlock switches are ordered separately. Specifications Applicable Model Shackle Diameter of Applicable Padlock Withstand Force Weight (approx) HS5D/HS5B Miniature Interlock Switches HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid HS5E-K es with Key ø5.5 to 7.5 mm 30N maximum 35g Dimensions When used with the HS5D/HS5B interlock switch When using with the HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switch -R 8 -ø8 -R 8 -ø8 8 8 (30) Rivet: Stainless Steel ø HS5D/HS5B 7.5 (30) Material: SPCC Thickness:.6 9 (36.) (9) Material: SPCC Thickness: Rivet: Stainless Steel ø Material: SPCC Thickness:.6 9 (06) (36.) (6) Material: SPCC Thickness:.0 HS5E/HS5E-K (35) (0) (6.3) All dimensions in mm. 80

81 HS5 HS5 Series Padlock Hasp Precautions for Installation When using the HS9Z-PH5 for safety-related equipment in a control system, refer to the safety standards and regulations in each country to make sure of correct operation. Also, perform a risk assessment to ensure safety before starting operation. Read the instruction sheet of the interlock switch to be used. Note the projections on the HS9Z-PH5 when using to prevent injury. Insert the HS9Z-PH5 in the direction as shown in the following fig ure. Do not insert from any other direction. Also, do not use the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. HS9Z-PH5 When using a hasp such as shown below, make sure that the hasp is installed in round holes not in the oblong hole. Otherwise the sliding tab may slide 3 mm or more. Check periodically that the narrow gap between the jaws is not widened, so that the HS9Z-PH5 does not fall off from the hasp. Narrow Gap Entry Slot Do not deform the HS9Z-PH5. The HS9Z-PH5 may come off from the interlock switch even if a padlock is installed. Stop using imme diately if the HS9Z-PH5 becomes deformed. The shackle diameter of the applicable padlock (refer to the follow ing figure) is ø5.5 to 7.5 mm. Shackle Diameter When using a hasp or special padlock, make sure that the sliding tab does not slide 3 mm or more in the direction shown below, oth erwise the HS9Z-PH5 may come off the interlock switch. Sliding Tab 3 mm 3 mm Cover Oblong Hole Keep the weight of padlocks and hasps to a maximum of 500g on one tab hole, and at a maximum of 3000g for the total of all tab holes. Using padlocks and hasps weighing over the maximum allowable weight may cause deformation of the HS9Z-PH5, and the interlock switch may be damaged.e interlock switch, otherwise failure or damage may be caused. Do not apply excessive shock to the HS9Z-PH5 while installing it on the interlock switch, otherwise failure or damage may be caused. Do not apply excessive vibration while padlocks or hasps are installed, otherwise failure or damage may be caused. The HS9Z-PH5 is used for HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switches. Do not use the HS9Z-PH5 for any other products. Make sure that locking and unlocking the padlock and hasp do not interfere with other products in close proximity. Do not modify or disassemble the HS9Z-PH5. Padlocks and hasps are available from the following manufacturers. Panduit Corporation ( Master Lock Company ( Round Holes 8

82 HS9Z ø/30 mm Padlock Cover Prevents unauthorized operation of key switches and interlock plugs used as hostage controls. Ideal to prevent machines from operating when two or more operators are inside the danger zone. When padlocked, the padlock covers prevent keys or plugs from being inserted into the locks. By providing each operator with a padlock to install onto the hasp before entering the danger zone, the machine can not restart until all operators have left the zone and removed their padlocks (use a hasp for three or more operators). Note: Use of padlocks to ensure safety requires strict observance of operating rules. Safety cannot be ensured if the rules are neglected, such as failing to install the padlocks. ø ø30 Padlock Covers Description ø mm Padlock Cover ø30 mm Padlock Cover Part No. HS9Z-PC HS9Z-PC30 Notes Key selector switch and interlock plug are ordered separately. HS9Z-PC (ømm) cannot be used on HWK and LW K. The nameplates for HW series cannot be used on HS9Z-PC. Specifications Applicable Model Shackle Diameter of Applicable Padlock Withstand Force Weight (approx.) ø mm ø30 mm ASW K HSP, ASN K, ASTN K, ASD K ø5.5 to 7.5 mm 30N maximum 55g Note: For the specifications of key selector switches and interlock plugs, refer to the specifications of HSP interlock plugs, ASW K, ASN K, ASTN K, and ASD K key selector switches. Dimensions HS9Z-PC Material: SPCC Thickness:.6 Coating: Red R ø. Rivet: Stainless Steel Mterial: SPCC Thickness: R ø.5 HS9Z-PC30 R ø. ø30.5 8

83 HS9Z HS9Z ø/30 mm Padlock Cover Instructions Mounting The direction to install the padlock cover is as shown in the figure on the right. <HS9Z-PC> Installation with ASW K Do not use an anti-rotation ring (OGL-3) or DOWN nameplate which is an optional accessory for the ASW K. Install the HS9Z-PC padlock cover between the panel and the bezel (see below). For panel mounting, refer to the instructions for the TW series control units. Panel Adjustment Ring Bezel Padlock Cover When using the panel thickness adjustment ring, add the thickness of the HS9Z-PC (.0 mm) to the adjustment value. <HS9Z-PC30> Installation for HSP Install the HS9Z-PC30 padlock cover between the panel and the bezel (see below). Refer to the panel mounting method of the HSP interlock plug. When adjusting the number of gaskets to suit the mounting panel thickness, add the thickness of the HS9Z- PC30 (.0 mm) to the adjustment value. Gasket UP When adjusting the rubber washer thickness to suit the mounting panel thickness, add the thickness of anti-rotation ring (0.8 mm), nameplate (0.5 to.0 mm), and the HS9Z-PC30 (.0 mm) to the adjustment value. Precautions for Installation When using the HS9Z-PC for safety-related equipment in a control system, refer to the safety standards and regulations in each coun try to make sure of correct operation. Also, perform a risk assess ment to ensure safety before starting operation. Read directions of the interlock plug and the key selector switch used. Make sure that the following requirements are satisfied when using the HS9Z-PC. I When a plug is installed on the HSP interlock plug, or a key is inserted to the key selector switch, the HS9Z-PC cannot be closed, and the HS9Z-PC cannot be locked using a padlock or a hasp. I When the HS9Z-PC is closed on the HSP interlock plug or on the key selector switch, the plug cannot be installed on the HSP interlock plug, and a key cannot be inserted into the key selector switch. Before closing the HS9Z-PC, make sure that the plug is removed from the HSP interlock plug, and the key is removed from key selector switch. When the plug of the HSP interlock plug or the key of key selector switch is deformed or damaged, replace it with a new one immediately. Otherwise the HS9Z-PC may be closed while the plug or key is installed, initiating operation. The applicable shackle diameter of padlock is ø5.5 to 7.5 mm. Anti-rotation Ring Panel Bezel Padlock Cover Installation for the ASN K, ASTN K, and ASD K () When using no nameplate To prevent the selector switch from turning, use of an anti-rotation ring (OGL-) is recommended. Install the HS9Z-PC between the panel and the bezel (see below). For panel mounting, refer to the instructions for ø30 mm control units. Washer Anti-rotation Ring Panel Bezel Padlock Cover () When using a nameplate Install the HS9Z-PC30 padlock cover between the nameplate and the bezel (see below). Do not interchange the order of parts, otherwise the padlock cover cannot be installed securely. Antirotation ring (OGL-) is not necessary when using NA or NALO nameplates. When using the CQN name plate, use of an antirotation ring (OGL-) is recommended. Nameplate Washer Panel Bezel Padlock Cover Symbols and marks can be engraved in the engraving area shown in the figures below NA NALO R 60 CQN 0 9 Shackle Diameter When using a hasp as shown below, check periodically that the narrow gap between the jaws is not widened, so that the HS9Z- PC does not fall off the hasp. Narrow Gap Because a variety of shapes are available on the market for padlocks and hasps, make sure that the requirements shown with I are satisfied when choosing the padlocks and hasps. Keep the weight of padlocks and hasps to a maximum of 500g on one side, and at a maximum of 3000g total of both sides. Using padlocks and hasps weighing over the maximum allowable weight may cause deformation of the padlock, and the HSP interlock plug and key selector switch may be damaged. Do not apply excessive shock to the HS9Z-PC, otherwise failure or damage may be caused. Do not apply vibration while padlocks or hasps are installed, other wise failure or damage may be caused. The HS9Z-PC is used for following applicable models. Do not use the padlock cover for other products. Applicable model of the HS9Z-PC Key Selector Switch ASW K Applicable model of the HS9Z-PC30 Interlock Plug: HSP Key Selector Switch: ASN K, ASTN K, ASD K Ensure that locking and unlocking the padlock and hasp do not interfere with other products in close proximity. Do not modify or disassemble the padlock cover. Stop using imme diately if the padlock cover is deformed. Padlocks and hasps are available from the following manufacturers. Panduit Corporation ( Master Lock Company ( 83

84 HSL es with Solenoid 3000N locking strength (largest in class)! Suitable for large and heavy doors. Same actuator as HSE (actuator retention force 3000N) Six contacts in a compact housing (same size as HSE) Same dimensions and mounting hole layouts as HSE (Size: mm) Door open, closed, and locked statuses can be monitored for various applications. Energy efficient new solenoid unit. 3% less solenoid current consumption compared with HSE. Manual unlock key and LED indicator are standard. Manual unlock key allows for manual unlocking in the event of power failure or maintenance. Indicator has an independent circuit, and can be used for various purposes. Two locking mechanisms to choose from spring lock (unlocked with energized solenoid) or solenoid lock (locked with energized solenoid). M3 terminal screws for wiring. Wide operating temperature range ( 0 to +55 C). LED Indicator Manual Unlock Key Straight (3000N) (SUS30) (Zinc Diecast). L-shaped (3000N) (SUS30) Angle Adjustable (vertical) (3000N) (SUS30) Ratings Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) Rated Operating Current (Ith) 300V 0A Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive Load (AC-) 0A 0A 6A Rated AC Operating Inductive Load (AC-5) 0A 5A 3A Current Resistive Load (DC-) 8A.A.A (Ie) DC Inductive Load (DC-3) A.A 0.6A Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, A (Applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types.) TÜV rating: AC-5 3A/50V, DC-3 A/30V UL, c-ul rating: A300 Pilot duty: AC 3A/50V Pilot duty: DC A/30V CCC rating: AC 5 3A/50V, DC-3 A/30V Solenoid Unit and LED Indicator Lock Mechanism Spring Lock Solenoid Lock Rated Operating Voltage V DC (00% duty cycle) Rated Current 00 ma (initial value) Coil Resistance 0Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 85% max. (at 0 C) Solenoid Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% max. (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Rated voltage 0% Applicable Voltage Maximum Continuous Continuous Applicable Time Insulation Class Class F Rated Operating Voltage V DC LED Rated Current 0 ma Light Source LED Illumination Color Green (G), Red (R) Specifications ISO9 IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) Applicable Standard UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC600-/EN600- (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature 0 to +55 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Overvoltage Category III Impulse Withstand Voltage Contact Resistance Insulation Resistance.0 kv (between LED, solenoid and ground:.5 kv) 50 mω maximum (initial value) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Between terminals of different poles: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Electric Shock Protection Class II (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel mm minimum Direct Opening Force 50N minimum Retention Force when Locked Operating Frequency Mechanical Durability Electrical Durability Conditional Short-circuit Current Weight (approx.) 3000N minimum (GS-ET-9) See page 87 for dimensions. 900 operations per hour,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) 00,000 operations minimum (AC-5 3A/50V),000,000 operations minimum (V AC/DC, 00mA) (operating frequency 900 operations per hour) 00A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast acting type fuse for short-circuit protection.) 50g (HSL-DQ) 8

85 HSL HSL es with Solenoid Parts and Functions Conduit Port Contact Mechanism (M3) Locking Ring LED Indicator Terminal Block (M3) Straight (3000N) (SUS30) Manual Unlock Key (Zinc Diecast) Angle Adjustable (vertical) (3000N) (SUS30) L-shaped (3000N) (SUS30) Locking Ring Two Entry Slots Part No. Development Code Main Monitor R: NC+NC NC/NO, NC DQ: NC+NC/ NO, NO NC+NC DT: NC+NC/ NC, NC NC+NC Solenoid Unit Voltage/ Lock Mechanism : V DC/Spring Lock 7Y: V DC/Solenoid Lock LED Rated Voltage : V DC HSL-DQKMSRP-R LED Color G: Green R: Red Conduit Port Size Blank: / P: PG3.5 M: M0 Housing Color R: Red and Black Locking Strength MS: 3000N Manual Unlocking Key K: With key Terminal Numbers X 3/33 X A A 6/63 3/ /6 -: Main circuit : Main circuit or monitor circuit (door monitor) : Monitor circuit (door monitor) 3/33: Monitor circuit (door monitor) 3/3: Monitor circuit (door monitor) 5: Monitor circuit (lock monitor) 5: Main circuit or monitor circuit (lock monitor) 6/63: Monitor circuit (lock monitor) 6/6: Monitor circuit (lock monitor) A: Solenoid ( ) A: Solenoid (+) X: LED ( ) X: LED (+) * There is no wiring between -5 with circuit code R. 85

86 HSL es with Solenoid Lock Mechanism Spring Lock Code R DQ (+) X Contact Configuration LED ( ) X Main: NC+NC Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Main: NC+NC NC+NC Main circuit: Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Door Monitor ( Inserted) Door monitor: NO/NC Lock monitor: NC Lock Monitor (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) A A Door monitor: NO Lock monitor: NO Conduit Port Size G/ PG3.5 M0 LED Indicator Manual Unlocking Key Part No. HSL-RKMSR-➁ HSL-RKMSRP-➁ HSL-RKMSRM-➁ G/ HSL-DQKMSR-➁ With With PG3.5 M0 HSL-DQKMSRP-➁ HSL-DQKMSRM-➁ Main: NC+NC NC+NC Door monitor: NC Lock monitor: NC G/ HSL-DTKMSR-➁ DT Main circuit: Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: PG3.5 M0 HSL-DTKMSRP-➁ HSL-DTKMSRM-➁ (+) X LED ( ) X Door Monitor ( Inserted) Lock Monitor (Solenoid ON) (+) ( ) A A G/ HSL-R7YKMSR-➁ R Main: NC+NC Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: Door monitor: NO/NC Lock monitor: NC PG3.5 M0 HSL-R7YKMSRP-➁ HSL-R7YKMSRM-➁ Solenoid Lock DQ Main: NC+NC NC+NC Main circuit: Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: 33 3 Door monitor: NO Lock monitor: NO G/ HSL-DQ7YKMSR-➁ With With PG3.5 HSL-DQ7YKMSRP-➁ M0 HSL-DQ7YKMSRM-➁ Main: NC+NC NC+NC Door monitor: NC Lock monitor: NC G/ HSL-DT7YKMSR-➁ DT Main circuit: Main circuit: Monitor circuit: Monitor circuit: PG3.5 M0 HSL-DT7YKMSRP-➁ HSL-DT7YKMSRM-➁ Specify an LED indicator color code in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red The contact configuration shows the status when the actuator is inserted and the switch is locked. s are not supplied with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. Straight L-shaped Description Angle Adjustable (vertical) (for hinged door) Package quantity: Accessories Description Key Wrench for TORX Screw (L-shaped) Conduit Port Plug (Size: G/ only) Package quantity: Key Wrench for TORX Screw is supplied with the interlock switch. Part No. HS9Z-AS HS9Z-AS HS9Z-A3S Part No. HS9Z-T HS9Z-P 86

87 HSL HSL es with Solenoid Dimensions and Mounting Hole Layouts Interlock switch when using straight actuator (HS9Z-AS) Interlock switch when using L-shaped actuator (HS9Z-AS) 0 (3.5 ±0.5 ) 55.8 mounting reference position Slot Plug (supplied with the switch) (Note) (8) (7.0±0.5) mounting reference position Entry Slot (Vertical to mounting panel) Entry Slot (Horizontal to mounting panel) When using the actuator entry slot vertical to the mounting panel. Mounting Hole Layout Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Install the interlock switch using four mounting screws when using the actuator entry slot vertical to the mounting panel, and three mounting screws when using the actuator entry slot horizontal to the mounting panel Cover HS9Z-AS Rubber Bushing 5 63 (5.3) mounting reference position ± ±0.5 (65.8) mounting reference position 89 -M5 Screws Cover HS9Z-AS Rubber Bushing 33.5 Straight (HS9Z-AS) L-shaped (HS9Z-AS) -M5 Screws ø M5 Screws ø (5.) Mounting Hole Layout When mounted (8) ø5. 3 Cover (gray) (Note) 5. Mounting Hole Layout ø5. 0 When mounted (8) Cover (gray) (Note) Angle Adjustable (vertical) (HS9Z-A3S) Stop Film (supplied with the actuator) Note: The actuator cover and the actuator stop film are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove them after the actuator position is determined. Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon sockethead bolt) 5 33 max. () R3. -M6 Screws Mounting Hole Layout All dimensions in mm. 3 Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure on the right, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is where the actuator stop placed on the actuator lightly touches the interlock switch. Note: After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator cover and the actuator stop film. Interlock Switch Acuator Cover HS9Z-AS Door Stop Door Stop Acuator Cover Interlock Switch HS9Z-AS Interlock Switch Stop Film HS9Z-A3S 87

88 HSL es with Solenoid Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Spring Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Manual Unlock Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Status UNLOCK Unlock position (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Diagram (HSL-DQ) Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HSL-DQ Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Contact Configuration (+) X LED ( ) X Main : Main : 33 Door Monitor ( inserted) 3 Lock Monitor (Solenoid OFF) (+) A ( ) A Main 5 Door Monitor (Door Open) 33 3 Lock Monitor (unlocked) 63-6 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Solenoid Power A-A OFF (de-energized) ON (energized) ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) Solenoid Lock Status Status Status Status 3 Status Manual Unlock Door Closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized Door Open Machine cannot be operated Solenoid energized Door Closed Machine cannot be operated Solenoid de-energized to energized Door Status UNLOCK Unlock position (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A (+) A ( ) A Diagram (HSL-DQ7Y) Door Closed (locked) Closed (unlocked) Open Open Closed (unlocked) HSL-DQ7Y Main ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) Contact Configuration (+) X LED ( ) X Main : Main : 33 Door Monitor ( inserted) 3 Lock Monitor (Solenoid ON) (+) A ( ) A Main 5 Door Monitor (Door Open) 33 3 Lock Monitor (unlocked) 63-6 ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) OFF (open) OFF (open) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) ON (closed) Solenoid Power A-A ON (energized) OFF (de-energized) OFF (de-energized) Note : Do not attempt manual unlocking while the solenoid is energized. Note : Do not energize the solenoid for a long period of time while the door is open or while the door is unlocked manually. Operation Characteristics (reference) ON (energized) (Note ) OFF to ON (Note ) (Note ) 0 ( insertion position). (Locked position) (Approx. travel in mm) Main Door Monitor (Door open, NO) Door Monitor (Door closed,nc) Contacts ON (closed) Lock Monitor (Unlocked, NO) Lock Monitor (Locked, NC) Contacts OFF (open) The operation characteristics show the contact status when the actuator enters into the center of the entry slot. The circuit No. - and -5 are interconnected. Use circuits - and -5 for safety circuits (In HSL-R model, circuit - is interconnected.) 88

89 HSL HSL es with Solenoid Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform a risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a breakdown or an accident may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Make sure that no force is applied on the actuator, otherwise the actuator may not be unlocked properly. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a breakdown. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere, or the switches are subject to direct sunlight. Use proprietary actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwse it will damage the interlock switch. The actuator retention force is 3000N. Do not apply a load higher than the rated value. When a higher load is expected, provide an additional system consisting of other interlock switch without lock (such as the HS5D interlock switch) or a sensor to detect door opening and stop the machine. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. While the solenoid is energized, the interlock switch temperature rises approximately 0 C above the ambient temperature (to approximately 95 C while the ambient temperature is 55 C). To prevent burns, do not touch. If cables come into contact with the interlock switch, use heat-resistant cables. Solenoid has polarity. Be sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. Do not install the actuator in a location where the human body may come in contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Install the actuator where it does not touch human body when the door is opened/closed. Otherwise injury may occur. Solenoid lock is locked when energized, and unlocked when de-energized. When energization is interrupted due to wire disconnection or other failures, the interlock switch may be unlocked causing possible danger to the operators. Solenoid lock must not be used in applications where locking is strictly required for safety. Perform a risk assessment and determine whether solenoid lock is appropriate. In order to prevent the interlock switch and actuator from being removed without authorization, it is recommended to install an one-way screw or a screw that needs a special tool for removal. Welding or rivet is also recommended. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z- A3S). Note: The following values apply when the actuator does not interfere with the interlock switch when opening and closing the door. Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. When using HS9Z-AS When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Minimum Radius 70 mm Minimum Radius 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Minimum Radius 50 mm Minimum Radius 80 mm When using HS9Z-A3S When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80 mm Minimum Radius 50 mm Minimum Radius 80 mm Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing on page 87). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not move. 89

90 HSL es with Solenoid Instructions Mounting Examples Install the interlock switch and actuator referring to the figures below. Application on Sliding Doors Door HS9Z-AS Latch Door Stop Application on Hinged Doors Door Latch HS9Z-AS HS9Z-AS For Manual Unlocking Spring lock The HSL allows manual unlocking of the actuator to precheck proper door movement before wiring or turning power on, as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Solenoid lock The solenoid lock interlock switch normally does not need the manual unlock. However, only when the interlock switch would not release the actuator even though the solenoid is de-energized, the interlock switch can be unlocked manually. Unlock the interlock switch manually only when the solenoid is de-energized. Do not unlock the interlock switch manually when the solenoid is energized. Using manual unlock key When locking or unlocking the interlock switch manually, turn the key fully using the manual unlock key supplied with the interlock switch. Using the interlock switch with the key not fully turned (less than 90 ) may cause damage to the interlock switch or operation failures. When manually unlocked, the interlock switch will keep the main circuit disconnected and the door unlocked. Main circuit and lock monitor circuit remain open. Do not leave the manual unlock key attached to the interlock switch during operation. This is dangerous and does not satisfy the requirement by safety standards, because the interlock switch can always be unlocked while the machine is in operation. Safety Precautions Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of interlock switch with solenoid is lost. On the solenoid lock, manual unlocking is provided for the situation where the switch cannot be unlocked even though the solenoid has turned off. Do not attempt manual unlocking while the solenoid is energized. Precautions for Opening and Closing the Lid When opening the lid before wiring, make sure to open only the lid shown the following figure. Removing unnecessary screws may cause a failure of the interlock switch. Use HS9Z-T key wrench for TORX screw when removing and installing the lid. Make sure that no foreign objects such as dust, water, or oil enter the interlock switch when wiring. Lid HS9Z-T L-shaped wrench (supplied with the switch) T0 Applicable Crimping Terminal ø3. min.. min. 6. max. Wire Approx. mm Insulation Tube 60 Applicable Crimping Terminal Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. Applicable Crimping Terminal Applicable Wire N0.5-3 / FN0.5 (JST) 0. to 0.5 mm N.5-MS3 (JST) 0.5 to.65 mm V.5-YS3A (JST) 0.5 to.65 mm Applicable Wire Size 0.5 to.5 mm UNLOCK UNLOCK Manual unlocking key (supplied with the switch) Normal Position Manual Unlocking Position Unlocking from the back of interlock switch Insert the tip of a small screwdriver into the oblong hole on the back of the interlock switch, and tilt toward the center of the switch until the actuator is unlocked. Note: Provide a hole on the mounting panel for unlocking from the back. When making a hole in the panel, take waterproof characteristics into consideration..6 90

91 HSL HSL es with Solenoid Instructions Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable glands. G/, PG3.5, M0 9 mm max. 30 mm max. When Using Flexible Conduit (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Conduit Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) PG3.5 RBC-03PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) M0 RLC-03EC0 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Conduit Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ PG3.5 M0 SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) ST3.5 (K-MECS) ST-M0X.5 (K-MECS) (Note) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) ABS-PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) ALS-EC0 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Note: When using the ST-M0X.5 cable gland, use together with a gasket (Part No.: GPM0, K-MECS). Conduit Port Opening Make an opening for wire connection by breaking one of the conduit-port knockouts on the interlock switch housing using a screwdriver. Before opening the conduit port, remove the locking ring for cable gland inside the interlock switch. When breaking the conduit port, take care not to damage the contact block or other parts inside the interlock switch. Also, take care not to damage the internal wiring. Cut wires cause operation failure. Cracks or burrs on the conduit entry may deteriorate protection against water. When changing to another conduit port, close the unused opening with an optional plug (Part No.: HS9Z-P). 7 Plug (HS9Z-P) ø6 G/ Recommended Tightening Torque HSL interlock switch: 3. to 3.8 N m (four M5 screws) (Note) Lid: 0.9 to. N m (M screws) Terminal: 0.6 to 0.8 N m (M3 screws) Cable gland:.7 to 3.3 N m s HS9Z-AS/AS:.7 to 3.3 N m (two M5 screws) (Note) HS9Z-A3S:.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) (Note) Note: The above recommended tightening torque of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. Wire Length Inside the Wire Length L (mm) Screw Through Conduit Port Terminal No. ➀ ➁ 95 ± 5 ± 85 ± 35 ± 60 ± 70 ± 3/33 75 ± 35 ± 3/3 50 ± 60 ± 65 ± 95 ± 5 5 ± 70 ± 5 55 ± 85 ± 6/63 35 ± 60 ± 6/6 5 ± 75 ± A 50 ± 5 ± A 60 ± 0 ± X 70 ± 35 ± X 80 ± 35 ± Wire Stripping Length: L (mm) 7 ± ➁ X X A A 6/63 3/33 3/3 ➀ 5 5 6/6 Interlock Switch Connector Note: HSL-R Do not remove the wire between terminals -, because these terminals are interconnected for safety circuit input. Use terminals - for safety circuit inputs. (GS-ET-9) HSL-DQ and HSL-DT Do not remove the wires between terminals - and -5, because these terminals are interconnected for safety circuit inputs. Use terminals - and -5 for safety circuit inputs. (GS-ET-9) L L 9

92 HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Dual main circuit + lock monitor circuit provide more safety to your system Basic unit and solenoid unit in one housing Lightweight plastic housing All terminal screws are M3.5, allowing easy wiring. Hostage Key Two main circuits NC+NC and a monitor circuit NC realizes duplicated main circuit and lock monitor. Hostage control can be achieved using the hostage key. Guard door can be locked automatically by installing the actuator on the guard and interlock switch on the machine. Equipped with two actuator entry slots. Double insulation structure 30 different numbers are available for key, so that neighboring switches cannot be operated by the same key. Retention Force 3000N Ideal locking mechanism and robust actuators for large doors. Accommodation of actuator entry slots to rattling doors is enhanced. Spring Lock Automatically locks the actuator without power applied to the solenoid. After the machine stops, unlocking is completed by the solenoid, providing high safety features. Manual unlocking is possible in the event of power failure or maintenance. s for 3000N* Retention Force Parts and Functions Conduit Port Use IP67 conduit or gland. Contact Mechanism Locking Ring Terminal Block (M3.5) LED Indicator (green or red) Straight Acuator (SUS30) Locking Ring (PA66) Two Entry Slots Right-angle (SUS30) Terminal Block for Indicator (M3.5) (Diecast Zinc) Angle Adjustable (SUS30) for Hinged Doors 9

93 HSE-K HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Lock Mechanism Contact Configuration Conduit Port Size Indicator Style Manual Unlock Key Hostage Key Part No. Spring Lock Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid OFF) 5 6 G/ PG3.5 Specify a key number in place of in the Part No. (T00 to T030) Key wrench for TORX screws (HS9Z-T) is supplied with the interlock switch. Specify an indicator color code in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red The contact configuration shows when the actuator is inserted and locked. is not supplied with the interlock switch, and must be ordered separately. / Key Wrench for TORX Screws With HSE-K80MSR- With With HSE-K8MSR-➁- With HSE-K80MSRP- With With HSE-K8MSRP-➁- Name Specification Part No. Ordering No. Package Quantity Straight HS9Z-AS HS9Z-AS Right-angle HS9Z-AS HS9Z-AS Angle Adjustable (for hinged door) HS9Z-A3S HS9Z-A3S Key Wrench for TORX Screws HS9Z-T HS9Z-T Conduit Port Plug HS9Z-P HS9Z-P Locking Ring for Gland M0 thread HW9Z-NM0 HW9Z-NM0PN05 5 When using M0 size gland, order locking ring HW9Z-NM0 separately. Part No. Development H S E - K 8 MS R P - R - T00 3 (+) ( ) 7 8 Main circuit ➀: NC+NC, Lock monitor circuit: NC Main circuit ➁: NC+NC Main circuit ➀: Main circuit ➁: Monitor circuit: Contact Configuration Main Monitor 8: NC+NC, NC+NC NC Solenoid Voltage : V DC Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC 0: Without indicator Retention Force MS: 3000N* Hostage Key No. T00 to T030 (30 types) Indicator Color Blank: Without indicator G: green R red Conduit Port Blank: G/ P: PG3.5 Housing Color R: red/black * Retention force for horizontal direction (parallel to the mounting panel) 93

94 HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Ratings Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V (between LED or solenoid and ground: 60V) Rated Thermal Current (Ith).5A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-).5A.5A Rated Current (Ie) (Note) Main AC Inductive Load (AC-5).5A 0.75A Resistive load (DC-).5A.A 0.55A DC Inductive Load (DC-3).3A 0.55A 0.7A Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma (Applicable range is subject to operating conditions and load.) TÜV rating AC-5 50V/0.5A DC-3 5V/0.A AC-5 0V/0.75A DC-3 30V/.3A CCC rating AC-5 0V/0.75A DC-3 30V/.3A Solenoid Model Rated Voltage Rated Current Coil Resistance Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Insulation Class Indicator Rated Voltage Rated Current Light Source Lens Color UL/c-UL rating 50V AC/0.5A Pilot Duty 30V DC/.0A Pilot Duty 0V AC/0.75A Pilot Duty C300 Q300 HSE-K V DC (00% duty cycle) 06 ma 6Ω (at 0 C) Rated voltage 85% maximum (at 0 C) Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Rated voltage 0% Continuous Class F The lens cannot be replaced. V DC 0 ma LED G (green), R (red) Specifications ISO9, EN088 IEC , EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved), UL508 (UL listed) Applicable Standards CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC 600-/EN 600- (applicable standards for use) Operating 0 to 0 C (no freezing) Temperature Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand kv (between LED or solenoid and grounding:.5 kv) Voltage Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal part and ground: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Protection Class II (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel mm minimum Direct Opening Force 0N minimum Retention Force Operating Frequency Mechanical Life Electrical Life Conditional Short-circuit Current Weight (approx.) 3000N minimum (GS-ET-9) (800N in the direction vertical to the mounting panel) 900 operations per hour,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) 30,000 operations minimum (key operation) 00,000 operations minimum (rated load),000,000 operations minimum (V AC/DC, 00mA, operating frequency 900 operations per hour) 50A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection.) 500g Example of Safety + Monitoring using 3-circuit es (safety category 3) Before operation of the following circuit, it is recommended for the entire safety-related system to undergo a third party evaluation. L (+) V DC F ESC: External Start Condition ESC K K S 3 S: Start Switch (HW Series Momentary) A S33 S3 S S 3 Safety Relay Module (HRS-AF) A S S S S S S3 S, S3: Unlocking Switch (effective after the hazard source has stopped) + COM0 0 3 DC DC. IN PLC (FCA MicroSmart) Ry. OUT COM 0 3 PL PL Monitor Door K K External Output K K 6 8 HSE Series Solednoid es (3-circuit) K, K: Relay/Contactor (forced guide contact) N ( ) 9

95 HSE-K HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Dimensions HSE-K Horizontal Mounting Straight (HS9Z-AS) Horizontal Mounting Straight (HS9Z-AS) 0 (3.5 ±0.5 *) Slot Plug (Note) (8.0) (7.0 ±0.5*) 55.8 [RP] [RP] M5 Mounting Holes Cover HS9Z-AS Cushion Sponge M5 Screws Mounting Hole Layout Mounting Reference Position As shown in the figure on the right, the mounting reference position of the actuator when inserted in the interlock switch is: The actuator cover lightly touches the interlock switch. After mounting the actuator, remove the actuator cover from the actuator. -M5 Screws ø M5 Screws ø5 (5.) ±0.5* 7.5 ±0.5 (5.3 [RP]) (65.8 [RP]) Cover Cover HS9Z-AS Cushion Sponge Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use three mounting screws to mount the interlock switch according to the mounting hole layout. * center position Dimensions Straight (HS9Z-AS) Right-angle (HS9Z-AS) Angle Adjustable (HS9Z-A3S) (Note) Stop Film (attached) 8 Door Stop Door Stop Mounting Holes When installed (8) ø5. 3 Cover (gray) 5. Mounting Holes Note: The actuator cover and actuator stop films are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator cover and actuator stop film after the actuator position is determined. ø5. When installed (8) 3 90 Cover (gray) max. () R3. Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon socket head screw) Door hinge -M6 Screws Mounting Holes 95

96 HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Spring Lock HSE-K8 MSR- (Main : NC+NC, NC+NC, NC) Status Status Status Status 3 Status Status 5 Status 6 Door closed Key is installed Solenoid de-energized Door closed Key is installed Solenoid energized Door closed Key is removed Solenoid energized Door open Key is removed Solenoid deener gized Door open Key is removed Solenoid de-energized Door closed Key is removed Solenoid de-energized Door (+) (+) ( ) 7 8 ( ) (+) ( ) 7 8 (+) ( ) 7 8 (+) ( ) 7 8 (+) ( ) 7 8 Diagram Contact Configuration Main : Main : Door Monitor Lock Monitor ( inserted) (Solenoid OFF) (+) ( ) Main Monitor -, 3-: Closed -, 3-: Open -, 3-: Open -, 3-: Open -, 3-: Open -, 3-: Open 5-6: Closed 5-6: Open 5-6: Open 5-6: Open 5-6: Open 5-6: Open Solenoid Power 7-8: Power OFF 7-8: Power ON 7-8: Power ON 7-8: Power OFF 7-8: Power OFF 7-8: Power OFF Remarks Door locked Key retained Machine ready to operate Door locked Key removable Machine cannot operate Door can be opened Machine cannot operate Machine cannot operate Machine cannot operate Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending interlock signals to the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends ON/OFF signals of the main circuit and monitoring signals of open/closed status of the protective door. Operation Characteristics (reference) 5 6 Solenoid is energized. Switch is OFF. Removing the key maintains the switch in OFF status Removing the key maintains the switch in OFF status Removing the key maintains the switch in OFF status Removing the key maintains the switch in OFF status Door can be opened Machine cannot operate 0 ( insertion position). (Locked position) (Approx. travel in mm) Main Door Monitor (Door open, NO) Door Monitor (Door closed,nc) Contacts ON (closed) Lock Monitor (Unlocked, NO) Lock Monitor (Locked, NC) Contacts OFF (open) e operation c aracteristics s o t e contact status en t e actuator enters into t e center o t e entr slot. e circuit No. and are interconnected. Use circui and or sa et circuits. 96

97 HSE-K Safety Precautions HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in the location where the human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. For HSE-K, do not apply excessive force to the locked key. Applying force to the key may interfere with solenoid operation, resulting in a failure to unlock. Also, applying a torque larger than.8 N m to the key results in damage. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. When wiring, unscrew the cover with part number label only. Unnecessary loosening of other screws may cause a malfunc tion of the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a malfunction. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switch in a dusty, humid, or organicgas atmosphere. Use dedicated actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. The cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. While the solenoid is energized, the interlock switch temperature rises to approximately 5 C. Do not touch to prevent burns. If cables come into contact with the interlock switch, use heat-resistant cables. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. retention force is 3000N (static load). When larger force is expected, add a system using interlock switch without lock (ex. HS5D) and sensor in order to detect door opening and to stop the machine. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown on the right. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A3S). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-AS (w/rubber cushions) When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Mnimum Radius 70 mm Mnimum Radius 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: Mnimum Radius 50 mm Mnimum Radius 80 mm HS9Z-AS HS9Z-A3S When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80mm Mnimum Radius 50 mm Mnimum Radius 80 mm HS9Z-A3S Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. Recommended tightening torque of angle adjustable screw: 0.8 N m After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not move. 97

98 HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Instructions Mounting Examples Mount the interlock switch on a fixed machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both interlock switch and actuator on the hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Application on Sliding Doors Door HSE Interlock Switch HS9Z-AS Latch Door Stop Application on Hinged Doors Door HS9Z-AS HSE Latch HS9Z-AS Manual Unlocking by Hostage Key (HSE-K) The HSE-K has a hostage key for manual unlocking of the actuator to precheck proper entry of the actuator into the slot as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Remove the screw located on the front of the interlock switch using the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. Insert a small screwdriver into the hole to push the lever inside the interlock switch away from the hostage key until the key is unlocked. Screwdriver Turn the hostage key to UNLOCK side to unlock the actuator as shown on the right. Note: Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of interlock switch is lost. After unlocking, install the screw. ➀ ➁ Opening/Closing the Cover (HSE-K) For safety, make sure that the power is turned off before opening or closing the cover. When opening the interlock switch cover, remove the screws of the cover only. Do not remove other screws, otherwise failure of inter lock switch will be caused. The cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. When wiring, make sure that any liquid such as water and oil does not enter the interlock switch. Close the cover in the following method.. Turn the key to LOCK position.. Close the door (actuator is inserted). 3. Turn the white plastic part in the interlock switch clockwise until the plastic part comes to the position shown in the figure below.. Close the cover and tighten the screws to the appropriate torque. Cover Attached Accessories L-shaped Wrench Part No.: HS9Z-T ➀ ➂ White Plastic ➁ Door closed (actuator inserted) 98

99 HSE-K HSE-K es with Solenoid (3-circuit) Instructions Applicable Crimping Terminal 3.6 min. ø3.6 min. 6.9 max. 3.5 max. Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. Applicable Wire Size 0.5 to.5 mm Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable gland. When using M0-size cable gland, use locking ring HW9Z-NM0. 9 mm max. Wire When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Conduit Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ PG3.5 M0 (Note ) Approx. Insulation Tube G/, PG3.5, M0 30 mm max. Applicable Crimping Terminal RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) RBC-03PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) RLC-03EC0 (Nihon Flex) Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock switch: 3. to 3.8 N m (three M5 screws) Lid mounting screw: 0.9 to. N m (M screw) Terminal screw: 0.9 to. N m (M3.5 screw) Connector:.7 to 3.3 N m s HS9Z-A3S:.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) HS9Z-AS/AS:.7 to 3.3 N m (two M5 screws) Mounting bolts must be provided by users. The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. Mounting bolts must be provided by the users. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator be installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws or welding the screws. Conduit Port Opening Make an opening for wire connection by breaking one of the conduit-port knockouts on the interlock switch housing using a screwdriver. When breaking the conduit port, take care not to damage the contact block or other parts inside the interlock switch. Cracks or burrs on the conduit entry may deteriorate the housing protection against water. When changing to another conduit port, close the unused opening with an optional plug (Part No.: HS9Z-P). Plug Part No. HS9Z-P When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Conduit Port Size Plastic Cable Gland Metal Cable Gland G/ PG3.5 M0 (Note ) SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) ST3.5 (K-MECS) ST-M0X.5 (K-MECS) (Note ) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) ABS- PG3.5 (Nihon Flex) ALS- EC0 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Note : When using M0 cable gland, order HW9Z-NM0 locking ring and replace with the locking ring installed in the HSE interlock switch. Note : When using ST-M0X.5 cable gland, use together with a gasket (Part No.: GPM0, K-MECS). 99

100 HSB/HSB es Machine stops when the door is opened. When mounting the actuator on a movable door and the interlock switch on a machine, opening or closing status of the door can be detected. Contact parts degree of protection: IP67 (IEC 6059) NC contacts feature direct opening mechanism (IEC/EN ). Special actuator prevents defeating (ISO 9, EN 088) Detects entry to hazardous area when mounted on safety guards. Two actuator entry slots and three conduit ports are pro vided. HSB: Rugged die-cast aluminum housing HSB: Compact and lightweight plastic housing HS9Z-A HS9Z-A Parts and Functions LED Indicator (optional) (green or red) M3.5 Screw Terminal Wiring Three Conduit Ports (G/) Use IP67 conduit or connector (see page 05 for details). LED Indicator (optional) M3.5 Screw Terminals for Wiring (inside) Two Entry Slots Three Conduit Ports (G/) Use IP67 conduit or connector (see page 05 for details). Two Entry Slots HSB (plastic housing) HSB (die-cast aluminum housing) Straight (SUS30) HS9Z-A Right-angle (SUS30) HS9Z-A Angle Adjustable for hinged doors HS9Z-A3 00

101 HSB HSB Contact Model Configuration NC-NO Zb 3 HSB NC Zb 3 HSB NC-NO Zb 3 Indicator Part No. HSB-R With HSB-R- HSB-0R With HSB-0R- HSB-NB With HSB-NB- HSB/HSB es s, Special Key Wrench, and Plug is not supplied with the interlock switch, and must be ordered separately. Description Straight (mainly for sliding doors) Right-angle (mainly for hinged doors) Angle Adjustable (mainly for hinged doors) Special Key Wrench for HSB Conduit Port Plug for HSB Part No. HS9Z-A HS9Z-A HS9Z-A3 HS9Z-T HS9Z-P The contact configuration represents the status when the actuator is inserted. Special key wrench HS9Z-T is supplied with the HSB interlock switch. Specify an indicator color code in place of in the Part No. G: green, R: red is not attached to the interlock switch and must be ordered separately. Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V (between LED and ground: 60V) Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 0A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-) 0A 0A 6A Rated Current (Ie) (Note) AC DC Inductive Load (AC-5) 0A 5A 3A Resistive load (DC-) 8A.A.A Inductive Load (DC-3) A.A 0.6A Note: Ratings approved by safety agencies: A300: AC-5 3A/50V Indicator Rated Voltage V DC Rated Current 0 ma Light Source LED Light Color G (green), R (red) The lens cannot be replaced. Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma (Applicable range is subject to the operating conditions and load.) Specifications ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards GS-ET-5 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) IEC 600-/EN 600- (applicable standards for use) 006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive) and 006//EC Applicable Directive (Machinery Directive) Operating 0 to 70 C (no freezing) Temperature Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand kv Voltage Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Electric Shock Protection Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal part and ground: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum HSB: Class I (IEC 60) HSB: Class II (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel mm minimum HSB, HSB (without actuator retaining mechanism): Direct Opening Force 0N minimum HSB (with actuator retaining mechanism): 36N minimum Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Mechanical Life,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-5) Electrical Life 00,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load AC-, 50V, 6A) Conditional Short-circuit Current Weight (approx.) 00A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection.) HSB: 80g HSB: 30g Part No. Development HSB HSB H S B - 0 R - R Indicator Color G: Green R: Red Housing Color Red only Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC Blank: Without indicator Contact Configuration : NC-NO 0: NC H S B - N B - R Indicator Color G: Green R: Red Housing Color Black only N: Retaining Mechanism Suitable for applications where inserted actuators should not come off easily. Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC Blank: Without indicator Contact Configuration : NC-NO 0

102 HSB/HSB es Diagram and Operating Character istics Status Status Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Door open Machine cannot be started Dimensions HSB using the Straight (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) 30 9 RP R.7 ø5. RP: Mounting Reference Position Conduit Port G/ Door Cover HSB- HSB- (NC-NO) Diagram + 3 Main Monitor + 3 Main Monitor Slot Plug (Note) (Vertical Mounting) RP ± R.7 ø Conduit Port G/ Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open Cover 8.5 ±.0 HSB-0 (NC) Monitor Diagram -: Open -: Closed 3 + -M5 Screws Mounting Hole Layout.5 HSB using the Right-angle (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) RP R.7 ø RP: Mounting Reference Position Conduit Port G/ Main Monitor - - The LED indicator terminal is independent of door status, and thus can be wired as necessary. 3-: Closed 3-: Open -: Closed -: Open 3 0 Cover 7.5 ± Slot Plug (Note) (Vertical Mounting) RP R ø5. Conduit Port G/ Main Monitor + 3 Main Monitor Cover 9.5 ±.0 -M5 Screws Mounting Hole Layout 5 Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. * center position 0

103 HSB HSB HSB/HSB es HSB using the Straight (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) RP: Mounting Reference Position 30 9 RP Conduit Port G/ (Vertical Mounting) 5.3 RP Conduit Port G/ ø5. ø Cover Cover ±.0 Slot Plug (Note) ± M5 Screws Mounting Hole Layout 5 HSB using the Right-angle (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) RP: Mounting Reference Position (Vertical Mounting) 30 RP Conduit Port G/ RP ø Conduit Port G/ Slot Plug (Note) 3 0 Cover ± Cover -M5 Screws 0 ø ± Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug sup plied with the interlock switch. Mounting Hole Layout Dimensions Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle-adjustable HS9Z-A3 -M6 Screws R M6 Screws Stopper Film (Note) Mounting Holes 7. Cover (red). Mounting Holes R3. 90 Cover (red) (Note). 5 0 R3. 33 max. () Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon socket head screw) 30 -M6 Screws Mounting Holes 0 Note: The actuator cover and actuator stop films are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator cover and actuator stop film after the actuator position is determined. 03

104 HSB/HSB es Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in the location where the human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. When wiring, unscrew the cover with part number label only. Unnecessary loosening of other screws may cause a malfunc tion of the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a breakdown. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Use dedicated actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. The HSB cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use the angle adjustable actuator (HS9Z-A3). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. When using the HS9Z-A Right-angle When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 30 mm 30 mm When the door hinges on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A 0 mm 00 mm When using the Angle-adjustable HS9Z-A3 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A3 80 mm 0

105 HSB HSB HSB/HSB es Instructions Mounting Examples Mount the interlock switch on a fixed machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both interlock switch and actuator on the hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Mounting on Sliding Doors Door Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable gland. 9 mm max. G/ 30 mm max. Applicable Crimping Terminal HSB Use Crimping Terminal for terminals other than the ground terminal. Use Crimping Terminal for the ground terminal. HSB Use Crimping Terminal for all terminals. 3.6 min. 3.5 max. ø3.6 min. Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal. Wire Approx. mm Insulation Tube HS9Z-A Door Stop HS9Z-A 6.9 max. Crimping Terminal Mounting on Hinged Doors Latch Crimping Terminal HS9Z-A 3.5 min. 3.8 max. ø. min. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. 7.6 max. Crimping Terminal When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Metal conduit example: (G/) RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Plastic cable gland: (G/) SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) Metal cable gland: (G/) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Applicable Wire Size 0.5 to.5 mm (AWG0 to AWG6) Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws es HSB:.5 to 5.5 N m (two M5 screws) HSB: 3. to 3.8 N m (two M6 screws) Terminal screw: 0.9 to. N m (M3.5 screws) s (HS9Z-A/A/A3).5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) Mounting bolts must be provided by users. The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. Conduit Port Opening (HSB) The HSB has three conduit ports, which are molded without opening. Make an opening for wire connection by breaking one of the conduit-port knockouts on the interlock switch housing using a screwdriver. When breaking the conduit port, take care not to damage the contact block and other parts inside the housing. Cracks or burrs on the conduit entry may deteriorate the housing protection against water. When changing to another conduit port, close the unused opening with an optional plug (Part No.: HS9Z-P). 05

106 HSC es with Solenoid The guard door remains locked until the machine stops completely. With the actuator mounted on the guard door and the interlock switch on the machine, the door is mechanically locked when closed. The door is unlocked by a solenoid lock-release signal from a PLC or another source after the machine has stopped, ensuring higher safety. In the event of power failure or for machine maintenance, the door can be unlocked using a special tool. Flexible installation: The actuator can be inserted into two directions. Select from four different circuit configurations. IP67 rated rugged die-cast aluminum housing. Parts and Functions Two Conduit Ports (G/) Use IP67 conduit or gland (see page for details). LED Indicator (green or red) Tubular Clamp Terminal Block (M3) Contact Mechanism (Direct Opening Action) Straight (SUS30) Two Entry Slots Ground Terminal (M) Indicator Terminal Block (M3.5) Right-angle (SUS30) Manual Unlocking Entry (M hole) Accessible using a small screwdriver after removing a TORX screw on the unlocking entry Angle Adjustable for hinged doors 06

107 HSC HSC es with Solenoid Contact Configuration Main : NC+NC Auxiliary : NO/NO + 5 Monitor Main Solenoid Power 6 Indicator Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically Main : NC+NC Auxiliary : NO Contacts are linked to the solenoid 8 mechanically Main : NC+NC Auxiliary : NC+NC Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically Main : NC+NC Auxiliary : NC Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically Monitor Main Solenoid Power Monitor Main Solenoid Power Indicator 7 + Indicator Indicator Solenoid Unit Location Right Right Right Right Part No. HSC-RR-➁ HSC-RR-➁ HSC-RR-➁ HSC-R3R-➁ The contact configurations show the contact status when the actuator is inserted and locked. The HS9Z-T special key wrench for removing the cover and manual unlocking is supplied with the interlock switch. Specify an indicator color in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red The solenoid unit installed on the left can be made upon request. s are not supplied with the interlock switch, and must be ordered separately. s/key Wrench/Screwdriver for TORX Screws Description Part No. Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle Adjustable (mainly for hinged doors) HS9Z-A3 Special Key Wrench for TORX HS9Z-T Part No. Development Solenoid Unit Location R: Right H S C - R R - R Diagram No. Main Auxiliary Blank: NC+NC NO/NO : NC+NC NO : NC+NC NC/NC 3: NC+NC NC Indicator Color G: Green, R: Red Housing Color R: Red only Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC Solenoid Rated Voltage : V DC Contact Ratings Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V (between LED or solenoid and ground: 60V) Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Main circuit: 0A Auxiliary circuit: 3A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-) 0A 0A 6A Main Rated Current (Ie) (Note) Auxiliary AC Inductive Load (AC-5) 0A 5A 3A DC Resistive load (DC-) 6A Inductive Load (DC-3) 3A 0.9A AC Resistive load (AC-) 3A 3A Inductive Load (AC-5) 3A DC Resistive load (DC-) 3A Inductive Load (DC-3) 0.9A Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma Note: Ratings approved by safety agencies: A300: AC-5 3A/50V Solenoid Unit Rated Voltage Rated Current Coil Resistance Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Insulation Class Indicator Rated Voltage Rated Current Light Source Light Color The lens cannot be replaced. Specifications V DC (00% duty cycle) 5 ma 58Ω (at 0 C) Rated voltage 85% maximum (at 0 C) Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Rated voltage 0% Continuous Class B V DC 0 ma LED G (green), R (red) ISO9, EN088, IEC EN (TÜV approved) GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC 600-/EN 600- (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand Voltage kv (between LED, solenoid and ground:.5 kv) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Insulation Resistance Between live metal part and ground: 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Protection Class I (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel mm minimum Direct Opening Force 0N minimum Retention Force 500N minimum (GS-ET-9) Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Mechanical Life,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) Electrical Life Conditional Short-circuit Current Weight (approx.) 00,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load AC-, 50V, 6A),000,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load V AC/DC, 00mA) 00A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection.) 660g 07

108 HSC es with Solenoid Dimensions HSC-R-R when using the Straight (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) RP: Mounting Reference Position Conduit Port G/ ø Conduit Port G/ 06 7 ø ±.0* R.7 RP ø Cover * ± R ø M5 Screws 30 9 RP Cover Slot Plug (Note) Mounting Hole Layout Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use four mounting screws to mount the interlock switch according to the mounting hole layout. * center position HSC-R-R when using the Right-angle (HS9Z-A) (Vertical Mounting) RP: Mounting Reference Position Conduit Port G/ ø Conduit Port G/ 06 7 ø5. 6 * 7.5 ±.0 * ø5. R.7 RP Cover 7 * * ± M5 Screws RP 0 30 R ø Cover Slot Plug (Note) Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use four mounting screws to mount the interlock switch according to the mounting hole layout Mounting Hole Layout * center position Dimensions Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle-adjustable HS9Z-A3 -M6 Screws R M6 Screws Stopper Film (Note) Mounting Holes 7. Cover (red). Mounting Holes R3. 90 Cover (red) (Note) Note: The actuator cover and actuator stop films are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator cover and actuator stop film after the actuator position is determined.. 33 max. () R3. Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon socket head screw) 30 -M6 Screws Mounting Holes 08

109 HSC Diagrams and Operating Characteristics HSC- R- (Main : NC+NC, NO/NO) Status Door closed Machine ready to operate Solenoid de-energized HSC es with Solenoid Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Door open Machine cannot be Machine cannot be started started Solenoid energized Solenoid energized Door open Machine cannot be started Solenoid de-energized Door Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor 3 Main Main Main Main Diagram 5 6 Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. 7 Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. 8 Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Open -: Closed -: Closed -: Closed Solenoid Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF HSC- R- (Main : NC+NC, NC+NC, NO) Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Door open Door open Door closed Status Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine ready to operate started started started Solenoid de-energized Solenoid energized Solenoid energized Solenoid de-energized Door Main Main Main Main Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor Diagram Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Open -: Open -: Closed -: Closed Solenoid Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending interlock signals to the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends ON/OFF signals of the main circuit and monitoring signals of open/closed status of the protective door. 09

110 HSC es with Solenoid HSC- R- (Main : NC+NC, NC/NC) Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Door open Door open Door closed Status Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine ready to operate started started started Solenoid de-energized Solenoid energized Solenoid energized Solenoid de-energized Door Main Main Monitor Monitor Diagram Solenoid Power Main Monitor Solenoid Power Main Monitor Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Closed -: Open -: Open -: Open Solenoid Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF HSC- 3 R- (Main : NC+NC, NC) Status Status Status 3 Status Door closed Door open Door open Door closed Status Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine cannot be Machine ready to operate started started started Solenoid de-energized Solenoid energized Solenoid energized Solenoid de-energized Door Main Main Main Main Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor Diagram Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Solenoid Power Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Closed -: Closed -: Open -: Open Solenoid Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending interlock signals to the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends ON/OFF signals of the main circuit and monitoring signals of open/closed status of the protective door. 0

111 HSC HSC es with Solenoid Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. When wiring, unscrew the cover with part number label only. Unnecessary loosening of other screws may cause a malfunc tion of the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a breakdown. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere, or in an area subjected to direct sunlight. Use dedicated actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. The cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch (HSB). Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. Recommended tightening torque of angle adjustment screw: 0.8 N m After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not loosen. retention force is 500N (static load). Make sure larger force is not applied. When larger force is expected, add a system using interlock switch without lock (ex. HSB) and sensor in order to detect door opening and to stop the machine. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in the location where the human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch on hinged doors, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. When using on doors with small minimum radius, use the angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A3). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-A When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 30 mm 30 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 0 mm 00 mm HS9Z-A HS9Z-A3 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80 mm HS9Z-A3

112 HSC es with Solenoid Instructions Mounting Examples Application on Sliding Doors Door HSC Interlock Switch HS9Z-A Latch Door Stop Application on Hinged Doors Door Latch Terminal No. to 6 Direct wiring using either solid or stranded wires. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. When using Ferrules Ferrules (Phoenix Contact) Part No. Applicable Wire AI GY 0.5 to 0.75 mm AI.0-8 RD 0.75 to.0 mm AI.5-8 BK.0 to.5 mm Crimping Tool: CRIMPFOX UD6 Applicable Wire Size Terminal Nos.,, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0.5 to 0.75 mm Terminal Nos. 3,, E:.0 to.5 mm Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable gland. HS9Z-A HSC HS9Z-A 9 mm max. G/ 30 mm max. Manual Unlocking The HSC allows manual unlocking of the actuator to precheck proper entry of the actuator into the slot as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Remove the screw located on the side of the interlock switch using the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. Insert a small screwdriver into the screw hole to push the lever inside of the inter lock switch toward the indicator until the actuator is unlocked. Note: Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of interlock switch with solenoid is lost. After unlock ing, ensure to install the screw. Applicable Crimping Terminal Terminal Nos. 7, min. ø3.6 min. Screwdriver Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal. Wire Insulation Tube Approx. mm 6.9 max. 3.5 max. Applicable Crimping Terminal Ground Terminal: E 3.5 min. ø. min. 7.6 max. 3.8 max. When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Metal conduit example: (G/) RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Plastic cable gland: (G/) SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) Metal cable gland: (G/) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock switch:.5 to 5.5 N m (four M5 screws) Terminal screws for terminal No. to 6: 0. to 0.6 N m (M3) Terminal screws for terminal No. 7 and 8: 0.9 to. N m (M3.5) (HS9Z-A/A/A3):.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) Mounting bolts must be provided by users. The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator are installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws, rivets, or welding the screws.

113 HSC HSC es with Solenoid Instructions Cable Lead-in Length and Wiring Examples Cable Length L (mm) Terminal No. Conduit Port ➀ ➁ 30± 5± 30± 50± 3 5± 55± 5± 60± 5 30± 65± 6 30± 70± 7 65± 35± 8 65± 0± E 85± 5± Wire Stripping Length L (mm) 7± Note: Wire the interlock switches according to the following examples. L L Gland When using Conduit Port ➀ When using Conduit Port ➁ Note: When wiring the ground (E) terminal, connect in the solid line direction only. Do not connect in the dotted line direction. 3

114 HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Operator s safety inside the hazardous area is ensured with the portable key. Hostage control for large system or machine applications is achieved. The door and key are locked during machine operation. The door is unlocked by removing the key, and the interruption of load circuit and control circuit are maintained. Ideal as a portable key for bringing into the hazardous area. 30 different numbers are available for key, so that neighboring switches cannot be operated by the same key. Flexible installation: The actuator can be inserted into two directions. IP67 rated rugged die-cast aluminum housing. Contact Configuration Main : NC+NC Auxiliary : NC+NC Solenoid Unit Location Right Part No. HSC-KR-➁- The contact configurations show the contact status when the actuator is inserted and locked. The HS9Z-T special key wrench for removing the cover and manual unlocking is supplied with the interlock switch. Specify an indicator color in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red Specify a key number in place of. s are not supplied with the interlock switch, and must be ordered separately. s/key Wrench/Screwdriver for TORX Screws Description Straight Right-angle Angle Adjustable (mainly for hinged doors) Special Key Wrench for TORX Part No. Development H S C - K R - G - Diagram No. Main Auxiliary : NC+NC NC+NC Solenoid Rated Voltage : V DC Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC Contacts are linked to the solenoid mechanically. Indicator Monitor Main Solnoid Power Part No. HS9Z-A HS9Z-A HS9Z-A3 HS9Z-T Key No.: T00 to T030 (30 types) Indicator Color G: Green, R: Red Housing Color R: Red only Contact Ratings 300V (between LED or Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) solenoid and ground: 60V) Main circuit: 0A Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Auxiliary circuit: 3A Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 5V 50V Resistive load (AC-) 0A 0A 6A Rated Current (Ie) (Note) Main Auxiliary AC Inductive Load (AC-5) 0A 5A 3A Resistive load (DC-) 6A DC Inductive Load (DC-3) 3A 0.9A Resistive load (AC-) 3A 3A AC Inductive Load (AC-5) 3A Resistive load (DC-) 3A DC Inductive Load (DC-3) 0.9A Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 ma Note: Ratings approved by safety agencies: A300: AC-5 3A/50V Solenoid Unit Rated Voltage V DC (00% duty cycle) Rated Current 305 ma Coil Resistance 79Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 85% maximum (at 0 C) Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Rated voltage 0% Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Continuous Insulation Class Class B Indicator Rated Voltage Rated Current Light Source Light Color The lens cannot be replaced. V DC 0 ma LED G (green), R (red)

115 HSC-K HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Specifications ISO9 EN088 IEC EN (TÜV approved) Applicable Standards GS-ET-9 (TÜV approved) UL508 (UL listed) CSA C. No. (c-ul listed) GB08.5 (CCC approved) IEC 600-/EN 600- (applicable standards for use) Operating 0 to 0 C (no freezing) Temperature Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Impulse Withstand kv (between LED, solenoid and ground:.5 kv) Voltage Insulation Resistance (500V DC megger) Between live and dead metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal part and ground: 00 MΩ minimum Between live metal parts: 00 MΩ minimum Between terminals of the same pole: 00 MΩ minimum Electric Shock Protection Class I (IEC 60) Degree of Protection IP67 (IEC 6059) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operating Speed 0.05 to.0 m/s Direct Opening Travel mm minimum Direct Opening Force 0N minimum Retention Force 500N minimum (GS-ET-9) Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Mechanical Life,000,000 operations minimum (GS-ET-9) Electrical Life Conditional Short-circuit Current Weight (approx.) 00,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load AC-, 50V, 6A),000,000 operations minimum (operating frequency 900 operations per hour, load V AC/DC, 00mA) 00A (50V) (Use 50V/0A fast-blow fuse for short-circuit protection.) 660g Dimensions HSC-K when using the Straight (HS9Z-A) (Horizontal Mounting) 0 35 Slot Plug (Note) 6.5 ± ± * ±* 9.5 ± M5 Mounting Holes HSC-K when using the Right-angle (HS9Z-A) 75 (Vertical Mounting) HS9Z-A -M6 Mounting Holes 0 HS9Z-A Slot Plug (Note) Mounting Hole Layout -M5 Screws * center position Note: Plug the unused actua tor entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use four mounting screws to mount the interlock switch according to the mounting hole layout Dimensions Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle-adjustable HS9Z-A3 -M6 Screws R M6 Screws Stopper Film (Note) Mounting Holes 7. Cover (red). Mounting Holes R3. 90 Cover (red) (Note). 5 0 R3. 33 max. () Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon socket head screw) 30 -M6 Screws Mounting Holes 0 Note: The actuator cover and actuator stop films are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator cover and actuator stop film after the actuator position is determined. 5

116 HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Interlock Switch Status Status Status Status 3 Status Status 5 Status 6 Door closed Key is installed Solenoid de-energized Door closed Key is installed Solenoid energized Door closed Key is removed Solenoid energized Door open Key is removed Solenoid energized Door open Key is removed Solenoid de-energized Door closed Key is removed Solenoid de-energized Door Contact Block Contact Block Contact Block Contact Block Contact Block Contact Block Diagram Contact Block Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contact Block Contact block is OFF with energized solenoid Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contact Block Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contact block is OFF with energized solenoid Contact Block Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contact block is OFF with energized solenoid Contact Block Contact block is OFF with key removed Monitor Main Solenoid Power Contact Block Contact block is OFF with key removed Monitor Main Solenoid Power Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Closed -: Open -: Open -: Open -: Open -: Open Solenoid 5-6: Power OFF Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power OFF Remarks Door locked Door locked Door can be Door can be Key is retained Key can be opened by hand (does not turn) Machine cannot Machine cannot opened by hand removed by turning Machine cannot operate operate Machine cannot Machine can Machine cannot operate operate oper ate operate Main circuit: Connected to the machine drive control circuit, sending interlock signals to the protective door. Monitor circuit: Sends ON/OFF signals of the main circuit and monitoring signals of open/closed status of the protective door. Safety Precautions In order to avoid electric shock or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock switch. If relays are used in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load, consider the danger and use safety relays, since welded or sticking contacts of standard relays may invalidate the functions of the interlock switch. Perform risk assessment and establish a safety circuit which satisfies the requirement of the safety category. Do not place a PLC in the circuit between the interlock switch and the load. Safety security can be endangered in the event of a malfunction of the PLC. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock switch, otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in the location where the human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock switch against excessive force. Do not apply excessive force to the locked key. Applying force to the key may interfere with solenoid operation, resulting in a failure to unlock. Also, applying a torque larger than.8 N m to the key results in damage. Regardless of the door status, the key is locked when the key is operated while the solenoid is de-energized. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock switch when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock switch exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock switch. When wiring, unscrew the cover with part number label only. Unnecessary loosening of other screws may cause a malfunction of the interlock switch. Prevent foreign objects such as dust and liquids from entering the interlock switch while connecting a conduit or wiring. retention force is 500N (static load). When larger force is expected, add a system using interlock switch without lock (ex. HSB) and sensor in order to detect door opening and to stop the machine. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock switch through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock switch may affect the mechanism of the interlock switch and cause a malfunction. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Do not store the interlock switches in a dusty, humid, or organicgas atmosphere. Use dedicated actuators only. When other actuators are used, the interlock switch may be damaged. Do not modify the actuator, otherwise it will damage the interlock switch. The cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock switch as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. 6

117 HSC-K HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key of Hinged Door When using the interlock switch for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A3). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-A When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: Manual Unlocking The HSC-K allows manual unlocking of the actuator to pre check proper entry of the actuator into the slot as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Remove the screw located on the front of the interlock switch using the special wrench supplied with the interlock switch. Insert a small screwdriver into the screw hole and push the lever inside of the interlock switch away from the key until the key is unlocked (see the figure below). Turn the key to unlock the actuator. 30 mm Lid Unlocking Screw 30 mm Screwdriver L-shaped Wrench (supplied) Part No. HS9Z-T When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A 0 mm 00 mm HS9Z-A3 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock switch surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: 80 mm HS9Z-A3 Lever Entry Slot ( slots) Note: Before manually unlocking the interlock switch, make sure that the machine has come to a complete stop. Manual unlocking during operation may unlock the interlock switch before the machine stops, and the function of interlock switch with solenoid is lost. After unlocking, ensure to install the screw. Applicable Crimping Terminal See page. Applicable Wire Size Terminal Nos.,, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0.5 to 0.75 mm Terminal Nos. 3,, E:.0 to.5 mm Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable gland. G/ 30 mm max. 50 mm 80 mm 9 mm max. Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. Recommended tightening torque of angle adjustment screw: 0.8 N m After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not loosen. Mounting Examples Mount the interlock switch on a fixed machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both interlock switch and actuator on the hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Application on Sliding Doors Door HSC-K HS9Z-A Latch Door Stop Application on Hinged Doors Door HS9Z-A HSC-K Latch HS9Z-A When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Metal gland example: (G/) RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Plastic cable gland: (G/) SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) Metal cable gland: (G/) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock switch:.5 to 5.5 N m (four M5 screws) Terminal screws for terminal No. to 6: 0. to 0.6 N m (M3) Terminal screws for terminal No. 7 and 8: 0.9 to. N m (M3.5) (HS9Z-A/A/A3):.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) Mounting bolts must be provided by users. The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock switch and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator are installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws, rivets, or welding the screws. 7

118 HSC-K es with Solenoid and Hostage Key Instructions Cable Lead-in Length and Wiring Examples Cable Length L (mm) Terminal No. Conduit Port ➀ ➁ 30± 5± 30± 50± 3 5± 55± 5± 60± 5 30± 65± 6 30± 70± 7 65± 35± 8 65± 0± E 85± 5± Wire Stripping Length L (mm) 7± Note: Wire the interlock switches according to the following examples. L L Gland When using Conduit Port ➀ When using Conduit Port ➁ Note: When wiring the ground (E) terminal, connect in the solid line direction only. Do not connect in the dotted line direction. 8

119 HSP Interlock Plug Unit Interlock plugs for controlling the safety in production areas. Ideal as a portable key for bringing into the hazardous area, or for detecting open/closed door status by chaining with a guarded door (chain must be provided by the user). Removing the interlock plug maintains the interrupted status of load circuit and control circuit. Bayonet-style plug removal/installation ensures stability. Prevents intentional short-circuit with a wire on metal chip. (Double-break internal contacts achieve high safety.) Solenoid type and non-solenoid type available. Solenoid type has a lock mechanism. Lock mechanism prevents removal of interlock plug during machine operation, and allows for removal after the machine has stopped, with solenoid energization signal. Manual unlocking is possible in the event of power failure or maintenance using a special tool (solenoid type only). Rugged die-cast aluminum housing UL listed, c-ul listed. HSP Interlock Plug Unit Solenoid No. of Indicators Part No. HSP--➁➁ With solenoid (V DC) HSP-3-➁ HSP--➁ Without solenoid HSP- Specify an indicator color code in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red Plug alone cannot be sold. Key wrench for TORX screws (HS9Z-T) is supplied with the interlock switch. Cable length is m. is also available upon request. Ratings Main Model HSP- HSP-3 HSP- HSP- Rated Insulation Plug Voltage (Ui) Contact Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) Micro Switch Rated Thermal Current (Ith) Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) Rated Operating Current (Ie) 30V 50V 30V 50V 5A (at V DC) 5A 0A (at V DC) 0A 30V 50V 5A 5A V DC 50V 5A (resistive load) 5A (0V AC, 30V DC) (resistive load) Solenoid Unit Rated Voltage V DC (00% duty cycle) Rated Current 60 ma Coil Resistance 95Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 90% maximum (at 0 C) Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Rated voltage 0% Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Continuous Power Consumption 6.3W Indicator Rated Voltage V DC Rated Current 0 ma Light Source LED Lens Color G (green), R (red) The lens cannot be replaced. Specifications UL508 (UL listed) CSA C., No. (c-ul listed) Applicable Standards UL98 CSA C. No. 8. EN 088 (applicable standards for use) Operating Temperature 0 to +50 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Insulation Resistance 00 MΩ minimum 500V DC megger Contact Resistance 300 mω maximum (initial value at cable length m) Dielectric Strength Between live and dead metal parts: 000V, minute Between terminals of the same pole: 000V, minute Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour Mechanical Life 30,000 operations minimum Interlock Plug Strength Rotational strength when locked: 5 N m Mounting Screw M5 Weight (approx.) 560g (HSP--➁➁) 800g (HSP-3-➁➁) Part No. Development Solenoid (indicator) : With (two indicators) 3: With (one indicator) : Without (one indicator) : Without (without indicator) Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC Blank: Without indicator H S P - - R G PL Indicator Color G: Green, R: Red PL Indicator Color G: Green, R: Red Cable Length : m 3: 9

120 HSP Interlock Plug Unit Dimensions HSP 7 Cable Length: m, PL PL 9 Cable Size HSP-: VCTF 0.75 mm (6-pin), Sheath outside diameter ø8.9 mm HSP-3: VCTF 0.7m (5-pin), Sheath outside diameter ø8.9 mm HSP-: VCTF.m (-pin), Sheath outside diameter ø8.5 mm HSP-: VCTF.m (3-pin), Sheath outside diameter ø7.8 mm Mounting Hole Layout 8 -M Diagrams and Operating Characteristics Interlock Plug Unit Status Interlock plug is installed Solenoid is de-energized Interlock plug is installed Solenoid is energized With Solenoid (HSP-) Interlock plug is removed Solenoid is energized Interlock plug is removed Solenoid is de-energized Without Solenoid (HSP-) Interlock plug is installed Interlock plug is installed Door Interlock Plug Interlock Plug Interlock Plug Interlock Plug Interlock Plug Interlock Plug Diagram PL PL Green Black Red Brown Yellow White To power + To machine + To power Solenoid Power Ground Main PL PL White Yellow Brown Red Black Green To power + To machine + To power Solenoid Power Ground Main PL PL White Yellow Brown Green Black Red To power + To machine + To power Solenoid Power Ground Main PL PL White Yellow Brown Green Black Red To power + To machine + To power Solenoid Power Ground Main PL White Red Black Green To power + To machine + Main To power Ground PL White Red Black Green To power + To machine + Main To power Ground Main Indicator (Note) Solenoid Power HSP-3 does not have PL. White - Yellow: Closed PL: ON PL: OFF Red - Black: Power OFF Micro switch turns off when solenoid is energized. White - Yellow: Open PL: OFF PL: ON Red - Black: Power ON Micro switch turns off when solenoid is energized. White - Yellow: Open PL: OFF PL: ON Red - Black: Power ON Micro switch maintaines off as the interlock plug is removed. White - Yellow: Open PL: OFF PL: OFF Red - Black: Power OFF HSP- does not have PL. Main circuit: Black and Red Ground: White White - Red: White - Red: Closed Open ON OFF Remarks Interlock plug is retained (cannot turn) Machine can operate Interlock plug can be removed by turning Machine cannot operate Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot operate Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot operate Interlock plug can be removed by turning Machine can operate Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot operate 0

121 HSP HSP Interlock Plug Unit Safety Precautions Do not install the interlock plug unit in places subject to oil or water. Electric shocks or fire hazard may be caused if the interlock plug is operated when the plug part is contaminated with oil or water. Interlock plug units are used to ensure the safety of operators who carry the plugs. Provide only one plug to a guard. Otherwise the hostage control function is lost, endangering the operators. Ensure complete safety management so that the function is maintained. Instructions The plug of HSP interlock plug units resemble the plug of HSP interlock plug units, however, these plugs are not interchangeable. Do not use the plugs of other types, otherwise the interlock plug units will be damaged. The plugs can be distin guished with the handlet color. HSP: black HSP: aluminum color When chaining a interlock plug unit with the door, give a proper slack to the chain and do not apply excessive force to the plug. PL shows solenoid power ON. If excessive force is applied to the plug, especially to the direction of removing the plug, solenoid operation failure may occur even though the solenoid is energized, resulting in unlocking failure. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. Do not store the interlock plug units in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Also avoid direct sunlight. The HSP allows manual unlocking of the plug to precheck proper installation as well as for emergency use such as a power failure.. Remove the screw located on the front of the interlock plug unit using the special wrench supplied with the unit. Insert a small screwdriver into the screw hole and push the lever inside as shown below until the key is unlocked.. Turn and remove the plug. 3. After unlocking, ensure to install the screw. Interlock Plug Unit Screwdriver Make sure that the interlock plug unit is not energized when removing or installing the plug (after operating the emergency stop button shown in the circuit example shown below). Do not start or stop the machine by plug removal/installation, otherwise the interlock plug unit may fail. [Interlock Plug Example] + Start R R In order to avoid electric shocks or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspec tion of the interlock plug unit. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock plug unit. Also do not disable the function of interlock plug unit intentionally. Otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Installing the Interlock Plug Units Secure the interlock plug unit using four M5 hex socket head bolts. [Example] When installing the door using a chain. Secure the interlock plug unit on the machine using four M5 hex socket head bolts.. Secure the chain on the plug handle and the door. 3. Do not use a chain which is unnecessarily long, so that the door does not open wide with the plug installed. Door Interlock Plug Unit Chain Plug Handle Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock plug unit:.5 to 5.5 N m (four M5 screws) Mounting bolts must be supplied by the user. The above recommended tightening torques of the mounting screws are the values with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not become loose after mounting. To avoid unauthorized or unintended removal of the interlock plug unit and the actuator, it is recommended that the interlock switch and the actuator are installed in an unremovable manner, for example using special screws, rivets, or welding the screws. Stop R Emergency Stop Switch Interlock Plug L Load Note: When using the main circuit on AC (HSP-, HSP-3), connect the emergency stop switch to Line, and the interlock plug unit to Neutral.

122 HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Interlock plugs with door lock mechanism for high level safety management. Installing the actuator on the guard door and the interlock switch on the machine, the guard door can be auto-locked mechanically. Removing the interlock plug maintains the interrupted status of load circuit and control circuit. Solenoid type and non-solenoid type available Solenoid type has a lock mechanism. Lock mechanism prevents removal of interlock plug during machine operation, and allows for removal after the machine has stopped, with solenoid energization signal. Flexible installation: The actuator can be inserted into two direction. Rugged die-cast aluminum housing UL listed, c-ul listed. Interlock Plug Unit Solenoid With solenoid (V DC) Without solenoid Part No. HSC-PZ-➁ HSC-P0Z-➁ Specify an indicator color code in place of ➁ in the Part No. G: green, R: red Key wrench for TORX screws (HS9Z-T) is supplied. is not supplied and must be ordered separately. s Description Part No. Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle Adjustable (for hinged doors) HS9Z-A3 Key wrench for TORX screws HA9Z-T Ratings Main Monitor Model HSC-PZ HSC-P0Z Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 50V (00% duty cycle) Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 0A Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 50V Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 3A Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 50V AC Rated Operating Current (Ie) 0.A 50V AC/ 30V DC (resistive load) 3A (50V AC/ 30V DC) (resistive load) Solenoid Unit Rated Voltage V DC Rated Current 60 ma Coil Resistance 95Ω (at 0 C) Pickup Voltage Rated voltage 90% maximum (at 0 C) Dropout Voltage Rated voltage 0% minimum (at 0 C) Maximum Continuous Applicable Voltage Rated voltage 0% Maximum Continuous Applicable Time Continuous Power Consumption 6.3W Indicator Rated Voltage Rated Current Light Source Lens Color V DC 0 ma LED G (green), R (red) Specifications Applicable Standards Main Auxiliary UL508 (UL listed) CSA C., No. (c-ul listed) UL98 CSA C. No. 8. UL508 (UL listed) CSA C., No. (c-ul listed) Applicable Standards for EN 088 Use Operating Temperature 0 to +50 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Insulation Resistance 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Contact Resistance 00 mω maximum (initial value) Between live and dead metal parts: Dielectric Strength 000V, minute Between terminals of the same poles: 000V, minute Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operating Frequency 900 operations per hour (actuator, plug) Mechanical Life 30,000 operations minimum (actuator, plug) Retention Force 500N minimum Interlock Plug Strength Rotational strength when locked: 5 N m Mounting Screw M5 Weight (approx.) 70g (HSC-PZ-➁) Part No. Development H S C - P Z - R Solenoid : With 0: Without Indicator Rated Voltage : V DC PL Indicator Color G: Green, R: Red Housing Color Z: Beige only The lens cannot be replaced.

123 HSC-P HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Dimensions Conduit Port G/ ø5. ø ± * * ± R * center position 7 -M5 Screws Slot Plug (Note) Mounting Hole Layout Note: Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock switch. Use four mounting screws to mount the interlock switch according to the mounting hole layout. Dimensions Straight HS9Z-A Right-angle HS9Z-A Angle-adjustable HS9Z-A3 -M6 Screws R M6 Screws Stopper Film (Note) Mounting Holes 7. Cover (red). Mounting Holes R3. 90 Cover (red) (Note). 5 0 R3. 33 max. () Angle Adjustment Screw (M3 hexagon socket head screw) 30 -M6 Screws Mounting Holes 0 Note: The actuator cover and actuator stop films are supplied with the actuator and used when adjusting the actuator position. Remove the actuator cover and actuator stop film after the actuator position is determined. 3

124 HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Diagrams and Operating Characteristics With Solenoid Interlock Switch Status Status Status Status 3 Status Status 5 Door closed Interlock plug is installed Solenoid deenergized Door closed Interlock plug is installed Solenoid energized Door closed Interlock plug is removed Solenoid energized Door closed Interlock plug is removed Solenoid deenergized Door open Interlock plug is removed Solenoid deenergized Door Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor Diagram 3 Interlock Plug 5 6 Main Solenoid Power Interlock Plug Main Solenoid Power Interlock Plug Main Solenoid Power Interlock Plug Main Solenoid Power Interlock Plug Main Solenoid Power 7 Microswitch turns on when the solenoid is energized. 7 Microswitch turns on when the solenoid is energized. 7 Microswitch maintaines ON status when the plug is removed. 7 Microswitch maintaines ON status when the plug is removed Main 3-: Closed 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Open -: Closed -: Closed -: Closed -: Closed Solenoid Power 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power ON 5-6: Power OFF 5-6: Power OFF Remarks Without Solenoid Status Door locked Interlock plug is retained (cannot turn) Machine can operate Door locked Interlock plug can be removed by turning Machine can operate Door can be opened Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot oper ate Status Status Status 3 Door closed Interlock plug is installed Door closed Interlock plug is removed 8 Door open Interlock plug is removed Door can be opened Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot oper ate 8 8 Machine cannot oper ate Door Monitor Monitor Monitor Diagram Interlock Plug 3 5 Main Interlock Plug 3 5 Main Interlock Plug 3 5 Main Main 3-: Closed 3-: Open 3-: Open Monitor -: Open -: Open -: Closed Remarks Door locked Interlock plug can be turned to remove Machine can operate Door can be opened Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot oper ate 8 8 Interlock plug is removed Machine cannot oper ate

125 HSC-P HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Safety Precautions Do not install the interlock plug unit with door lock in the place subject to oil or water. Electric shocks or fire hazard may be caused if the interlock plug is operated when the plug part is contaminated with oil or water. Interlock plug units with door lock are used to ensure the safety of operators who carry the plugs. Provide only one plug to a guard. Otherwise the hostage control function is lost, endangering the operators. Ensure complete safety management so that the function is maintained. In order to avoid electric shocks or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspection of the interlock plug unit. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock plug unit with door lock Also do not disable the function of interlock plug unit intentionally. Otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Do not install the actuator in a location where a human body may come into contact. Otherwise injury may occur. Instructions The plug of HSP interlock plug units resemble the HSP plug, however, these plugs are not interchangeable. Do not use the plugs of other types, otherwise the interlock plug units will be damaged. The plugs can be distinguished with the handle color. HSP: black (sane as HSC-P) HSP: aluminum color Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock plug unit as a door stop. Install a mechanical door stop at the end of the door to protect the interlock plug unit against excessive force. If excessive force is applied to the plug, especially to the direc tion of removing the plug, solenoid operation failure may occur even though the solenoid is energized, resulting in unlocking failure. Do not apply excessive shock to the interlock plug unit when opening or closing the door. A shock to the interlock plug unit exceeding,000 m/s may cause damage to the interlock plug unit. Regardless of door types, do not use the interlock plug unit as a door lock. Install a separate lock using a latch or other measures. The solenoid has polarity. Make sure of the correct polarity when wiring. Do not apply overvoltage, otherwise the solenoid will be burnt. When wiring, unscrew the cover only. Unnecessary loosening of other screws may cause a malfunction of the interlock plug unit. Cover The cover uses special screws which cannot be removed or tightened by general drivers. Use the special wrench supplied with the interlock plug unit. While connecting to the conduit port, prevent foreign objects from entering the interlock plug unit, such as dust and liquids. If the operating atmosphere is contaminated, use a protective cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the interlock plug unit through the actuator entry slots. Entry of a considerable amount of foreign objects into the interlock plug unit may affect the mechanism of the interlock plug unit and cause a malfunction. retention force is 500N (static load). When larger force is expected, add a system using interlock switch without lock (ex. HSB) and sensor in order to detect door opening and to stop the machine. Plug the unused actuator entry slot using the slot plug supplied with the interlock plug unit. Do not store the interlock plug unit in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Make sure that the interlock plug unit is not energized when removing or installing the plug (after operating the emergency stop button shown in the circuit example shown below). Do not start or stop the machine by plug removal/installation, otherwise the interlock plug unit may fail. Interlock Plug Example + Start Stop R R Emergency Stop Switch Interlock Plug L R Load Note : When using the main circuit on AC, connect emergency stop switch to Line, and interlock plug unit to Neutral. Note : When using the main circuit on DC, connect to the + line with emergency stop switch first followed by the interlock plug unit. Manual Unlocking The HSC-P allows manual unlocking of the actuator to precheck proper entry of the actuator into the slot as well as for emergency use such as a power failure. Remove the screw located on the front of the interlock plug unit using the special wrench supplied with the interlock plug unit. Insert a small screwdriver into the screw hole and push the lever inside as shown below until the key is unlocked. Turn and remove the plug. After unlocking, ensure to install the screw. Interlock Plug Unit Plug Screwdriver 5

126 HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Instructions of Hinged Door When using the interlock plug unit for a hinged door, refer to the minimum radius of doors shown below. For the doors with small minimum radius, use angle adjustable actuators (HS9Z-A3). Note: Because deviation or dislocation of hinged door may occur in actual applications, make sure of the correct operation before installation. HS9Z-A When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock plug unit surface: 30 mm Applicable Crimping Terminal Terminal Nos. 7, min. ø3.6 min. 6.9 max. 3.5 max. Ground Terminal: E 3.5 min. ø. min. Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal Wire Approx. mm Applicable Crimping Terminal 7.6 max. 3.8 max. 30 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A 0 mm 00 mm HS9Z-A3 When the door hinge is on the extension line of the interlock plug unit surface: 50 mm When the door hinge is on the extension line of the actuator mounting surface: HS9Z-A3 Insulation Tube Terminal No. to 6 Direct wiring using either solid or stranded wires. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. When using Ferrules Ferrules (Phoenix Contact) Part No. Applicable Wire AI GY 0.5 to 0.75 mm AI.0-8 RD 0.75 to.0 mm AI.5-8 BK.0 to.5 mm Crimping Tool: CRIMPFOX UD6 Applicable Wire Size Terminal Nos.,, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0.5 to 0.75 mm Terminal Nos. 3,, E:.0 to.5 mm Installing the Interlock Plug Unit Mount the interlock plug unit on a fixed machine or guard, and mount the actuator on the hinged door. Do not mount both safety plug unit and actuator on the hinged doors, otherwise malfunction will occur. Aplication on Sliding Doors Door 80 mm Angle Adjustment Using the angle adjustment screw, the actuator angle can be adjusted (refer to the dimensional drawing). Adjustable angle: 0 to 0 The larger the adjusted angle of the actuator, the smaller the applicable radius of the door opening. After installing the actuator, open the door. Then adjust the actuator so that its edge can be inserted properly into the actuator entry slot of the interlock switch. Recommended tightening torque of angle adjustment screw: 0.8 N m After adjusting the actuator angle, apply Loctite to the adjustment screw so that the screw will not loosen. HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit Latch Application on Hinged Doors Door HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit Latch HS9Z-A Door Stop HS9Z-A HS9Z-A 6

127 HSC-P HSC-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock Instructions Applicable Cable Glands Use IP67 cable gland. 9 mm max. G/ 30 mm max. When Using Flexible Conduits (Example) Flexible conduit example: VF-03 (Nihon Flex) Metal gland example: (G/) RLC-03 (Nihon Flex) When Using Multi-core Cables (Example) Plastic cable gland: (G/) SCS-0 (Seiwa Electric) Metal cable gland: (G/) ALS-6 (Nihon Flex) Different cable glands are used depending on the cable sheath outside diameter. When purchasing a cable gland, confirm that the cable gland is applicable to the cable sheath outside diameter. Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws Interlock switch:.5 to 5.5 N m (four M5 screws) (HS9Z-A/A/A3):.5 to 5.5 N m (two M6 screws) Mounting bolts must be provided by users. The above recommended tightening torques of the mount ing screws are the values confirmed with hex socket head bolts. When other screws are used and tightened to a smaller torque, make sure that the screws do not come loose after mounting. Cable Lead-in Length and Wiring Examples Cable Length L (mm) Terminal No. Conduit Port ➀ ➁ 30± 5± 30± 50± 3 5± 55± 5± 60± 5 30± 65± 6 30± 70± 7 65± 35± 8 65± 0± E 85± 5± Wire Stripping Length 7± L (mm) Note: Wire the interlock switches according to the following examples. When using Conduit Port ➀ Note: When wiring the ground (E) terminal, connect in the solid line direction only. Do not connect in the dotted line direction. L L Gland When using Conduit Port ➁ 7

128 HSP Interlock Plug Unit Interlock plugs for controlling the safety at production sites. Ideal as a portable key for bringing into the hazardous area. Removing the interlock plug maintains the interrupted status of load circuit and control circuit. Bayonet-style plug removal/installation ensures stability. Prevents intentional short-circuit with a wire or metal chip. (Double-break internal contacts achieve high safety.) ø30mm mounting hole Plastic housing with die-cast aluminum plug Terminal cover is provided as standard. UL listed, c-ul listed. Interlock Plug Unit Part No. HSP-M Dimensions ø R0.8 max Specifications UL508 (UL listed) CSA C., No. (c-ul listed) Applicable Standards UL98 CSA C. No. 8. EN 088 (applicable standards for use) Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 50V Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 0A Operating Temperature 0 to +50 C (no freezing) Relative Humidity 5 to 85% (no condensation) Storage Temperature 0 to +80 C (no freezing) Pollution Degree 3 Insulation Resistance 00 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Dielectric Strength Between live and dead metal parts: 000V, minute Between terminals of the same poles: 000V, minute Contact Resistance 00 mω minimum (initial value) Shock Resistance Damage limits: 000 m/s Operating extremes: Vibration Resistance 0 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude.5 mm minimum Operation Method With dedicated plug Mechanical Life 30,000 operations minimum Operating Characteristics Interlock Plug Strength Weight (approx.) Operating angle 5 Pull-out stroke 3.0mm minimum Rotation strength when locked: 3.0 N m minimum 50g Panel Thickness.5 to. (when using anti-rotation ring) (.3) Terminal Screw M ø M30 Thread Terminal Cover HW-VL3 Panel Cut-out ø : For anti-rotation projection Anti-rotation Ring OGL- 8

129 HSP HSP Interlock Plug Unit Safety Precautions Do not install the interlock plug unit in places subject to oil or water. Electric shock or fire hazard may be caused if the interlock plug is operated when the plug part is contaminated with oil or water. Interlock plug units are used to ensure the safety of operators who carry the plugs. Provide only one plug to a guard. Otherwise the hostage control function is lost, endangering the operators. Ensure complete safety management so that the function is maintained. In order to avoid electric shocks or fire, turn power off before installation, removal, wire connection, maintenance, or inspec tion of the interlock plug unit. Do not disassemble or modify the interlock plug unit. Also do not disable the function of interlock plug unit intentionally. Otherwise a malfunction or an accident may occur. Instructions The plug of HSP interlock plug units resemble the plug of HSP interlock plug units, however, these plugs are not interchangeable. Do not use the plugs of other types, otherwise the interlock plug units will be damaged. The plugs can be distin guished with the handle color. HSP: black HSP: aluminum color Do not store the interlock plug units in a dusty, humid, or organic-gas atmosphere. Also avoid direct sunlight. Make sure that the interlock plug unit is not energized when removing or installing the plug (after operating the emergency stop button shown in the circuit example shown below). Do not start or stop the machine by plug removal/installation, other wise the interlock plug unit may fail. [Interlock Plug Example] + Start Stop R Emergency Stop Switch R Installing the Anti-rotation Ring When mounting the HSP interlock plug on a panel, align the recess on the panel and the projection of the anti-rotating ring as shown below. Recess Locking Ring Mounting Panel Gasket (.5t) Projection Anti-rotation Gasket Ring (for thickness adsjustment) Interlock Plug Installing the Locking Ring Using locking ring wrench OR- sold separately, tighten the locking ring to a torque of.8 to. N m. Do not tighten with excessive force, otherwise the interlock plug will be damaged. Applicable Crimping Terminal R Interlock Plug L Load 8.0 max. 3.5 min..0 max. 6.0 min. Mounting Panel Thickness and Gaskets The HSP interlock plug is supplied with gaskets (.5-mmthick and 0.5-mm-thick ) and an anti-rotation ring. Adjust the number of gaskets depending on the mounting panel thickness as shown in the table below. Do not use other combination of gaskets, otherwise the interlock plug will be damaged and waterproof function will be lost. Mounting Panel Thickness (mm) Gasket Combination.5 to.7.0 to to..5t 0.5t.5t.5t 0.5t Use an insulation tube on the crimping terminal. When using stranded wires, make sure that loose wires do not cause short circuit. Also, do not solder the terminal to prevent loose wires. Applicable Wire Size ø.0 mm maximum (solid wire: ø.6mm maximum) Recommended Tightening Torque of Mounting Screws (M3.5) 0.9 to. N m 9

130 with Plastic Holder HS5 series interlock switches detect the installation/removal of grip style enabling switches. The actuator with plastic holder for the HS5 series interlock switches can be installed onto the HEG/HEG-L/ HEG grip style enabling switches easily using the two mounting screws supplied with the actuator. Inserting the actuator on the grip style enabling switch into the entry slot of HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switch, the grip style enabling switch can be retained firmly in position. Using with HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switches prevent unauthorized removal of grip style enabling switches. with Plastic Holder Easy switching by removing/installing the grip style enabling switches can be achieved by designing the HS5B circuit to initiate automatic or manual operation when the interlock switch is installed or removed, respectively. HS5E Description Part No. with plastic holder for HE9Z-GP5 HEG/HEG-L/HEG Note: The HEG/HEG-L/HEG grip style enabling switches and HS5 series interlock switches are ordered separately. Specifications HEG/HEG-L/HEG Grip Style Enabling Switch Applicable Model HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K Interlock Switch Mechanical Durability 0,000 operations Weight (approx.) 30g Note: Refer to the specifications of HEG/HEG-L/HEG grip style enabling switches and HS5D/HS5B/HS5E/HS5E-K interlock switches. Dimensions When used with an HEG/HEG-L and HS5D/HS5B When used with an HEG/HEG-L and HS5E/HS5E-K (6) 70 (58) (6) (58) (7) (7) Plastic Holder: Polyacetal, black (76) Plastic Holder: Polyacetal, black (33) 5 : Stainless Steel Screw/Nut: Steel (30) (36.) (9) 38 (30) (86) HS5D/HS5B 5 : Stainless Steel (06) (36.) (6) 38 (86) Tapping Screw: Steel (supplied) (35) (6.3) (0) HS5E/HS5E-K Screw/Nut: Steel Tapping Screw: Steel (supplied) All dimensions in mm. 30

HS6B HS6E. Angled connection. cable. Compact with three poles of contacts. (HS6B) Small interlock switch with five poles and solenoid.

HS6B HS6E. Angled connection. cable. Compact with three poles of contacts. (HS6B) Small interlock switch with five poles and solenoid. with Solenoid Space saving design with angled connection cable 30mm Angled connection cable 30mm Space Saving (Approx. 30 mm) Manual Unlocking Possible from Three Directions The actuator can be unlocked

More information

HS6E Subminiture Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS6E Subminiture Interlock Switches with Solenoid Small interlock switch with five poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in tight spaces. Compact body: 75 15 75 mm 15-mm-wide, thinnest solenoid interlock switch in the world. Reversible mounting and

More information

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid Small interlock switch with four poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in small spaces. Compact body. 3 40 46 mm. Four-pole internal switches. Gold-plated contacts. Spring lock and solenoid lock types

More information

Safety Products. Safety Products. HS5E Series. HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switch

Safety Products. Safety Products. HS5E Series. HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switch HS5E Series HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switch HS5E Key features include: World s smallest 4 contact solenoid interlock switch. (35 40 46 mm.) Four contacts. Gold-plated contacts. Spring lock

More information

HS1C Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS1C Interlock Switches with Solenoid HSC es with The guard door remains locked until the machine stops completely. With the actuator mounted on the guard door and the interlock switch on the machine, the door is mechanically locked when closed.

More information

Interlock Switches. Safety. Selection Guide HS6B Subminiature HS5D Miniature HS2B Full Size...

Interlock Switches. Safety.   Selection Guide HS6B Subminiature HS5D Miniature HS2B Full Size... Safety Selection Guide... 70 HS6B Subminiature... 7 HS5D Miniature... 76 HSB Full Size... 83 HSB Full Size... 87 HS6E Subminiature with Solenoid... 90 HS5E Miniature with Solenoid... 99 HSE Full Size Solenoid

More information

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid 3000N locking strength (largest in class)! * Suitable for large and heavy doors. Same actuator as HS1E (actuator retention force 3000N) Six contacts in a compact housing

More information

Door Interlock Switches

Door Interlock Switches HSE Series HSE Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switches Overview X Series E-Stops HSE features: World s smallest 4 contact solenoid interlock switch. (3 x x 46 mm) Four contacts Gold-plated contacts

More information

HS6E - L 4 4 B 01 - G

HS6E - L 4 4 B 01 - G HS6E Series HS6E Subminiature Interlock Switches with Solenoid HS6E features: Compact body: 75 15 75 mm 15-mm-wide, thinnest solenoid type interlock switch in the world. Reversible mounting and angled

More information

SG-B1 SERIES / SG-A1 SERIES

SG-B1 SERIES / SG-A1 SERIES 643 Door with Solenoid Interlock / Door Ultra-slim SG-B1 SERIES / SG-A1 SERIES Related Information General terms and conditions... F-7 General precautions... P.1501 PHOTO PHOTO Conforming to Machine &

More information

HS6E Subminiature Interlock Switches with Solenoid. Double Installation. Part Number. Cable Length (+) ( ) A2 A1

HS6E Subminiature Interlock Switches with Solenoid. Double Installation. Part Number. Cable Length (+) ( ) A2 A1 HS6E Subminiature Interlock Switches with Solenoid HS6E features: Compact body: 75 15 75 mm 15-mm-wide, thinnest solenoid type interlock switch in the world. Reversible mounting and angled cable allow

More information

HS6B Series Subminiature Interlock Switch

HS6B Series Subminiature Interlock Switch HS6B Series Subminiature Interlock Switch HS6B features: Only 78 x 30 x 15mm Allows highest level of safety by having 3 contacts: dual load contacts + monitoring contact (ISO13849-1, EN954-1) Two actuator

More information

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Small safety switch with four poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in tight spaces. Compact body. 35 40 146 mm. Rear unlocking button for emergency escape available.

More information

HS1E-K Interlock Switches with Solenoid (3-circuit)

HS1E-K Interlock Switches with Solenoid (3-circuit) HS1E-K Interlock Switches with Solenoid (-circuit) Dual main circuit + lock monitor circuit provide more safety to your system Basic unit and solenoid unit in one housing Lightweight plastic housing All

More information

HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switches

HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switches HS5E Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switches AS-Interface Safety at Work Barriers Enabling Switches Door Interlock Switches X Series E-Stops Overview HS5E features: World s smallest 4 contact solenoid

More information

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS5E Miniature Interlock Switches with Solenoid HS5E Miniature es with Solenoid Small safety switch with four poles and solenoid. Ideal for applications in tight spaces. Compact body. 35 40 146 mm. Rear unlocking button for emergency escape available.

More information

HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches

HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches Head Removal Detection Function for Safer Performance Clearwater Tech - Phone: 8094.04 - Fax: 8.368.04 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: info@clrwtr.com New Generation Miniature

More information

Door Interlock Switches

Door Interlock Switches Safety Door Interlock Switches For more information on this product family, visit our website. Additional resources include: New and updated product information Downloadable software demos & upgrades Part

More information

HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches

HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches Head removal detection for safer performance. Head removal detection function turns OFF the main circuit (-) when the head of the is removed. The is the same size as contact interlock switches (HS5B).

More information

Door Interlock Switches

Door Interlock Switches HSE Series HSE Series Miniature Solenoid Locking Switches Overview X Series E-Stops HSE features: World s smallest 4 contact solenoid interlock switch. (3 x 40 x 146 mm) Four contacts Gold-plated contacts

More information

HS1C-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock

HS1C-P Interlock Plug Unit with Door Lock HSC-P Unit with Lock Interlock plugs with door lock mechanism for high level safety management. Installing the actuator on the guard door and the interlock switch on the machine, the guard door can be

More information

panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global Solve issues related to machine safety and other safety measures with a safety door switch with key!

panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global Solve issues related to machine safety and other safety measures with a safety door switch with key! 655 Door with Key SERIES Related Information General terms and conditions... F-7 General precautions... P.50 PHOTO PHOTO Conforming to Machine & EMC Directives Recognition Certified MEASURE ITY panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global

More information

Standard Interlock Safety Switches

Standard Interlock Safety Switches Subminiature Interlock Switches Key features: Only 78 x 30 x 1m Two actuator entrances provide flexibility for installation options Integrated molded cable reduces wiring time IP67 (IEC60529) Direct Opening

More information

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid 3000N locking strength (largest in class)! * Suitable for large and heavy doors. Same actuators as HS1E (locking strength 3000N) can be used. *As of October 2009, according to IDEC research of plastic

More information

HS1E Series Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid

HS1E Series Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid HS1E Series HS1E Series Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid HS1E Key features include: Basic unit and solenoid unit in one housing Plastic Housing: Light weight Ease of Wiring: All the terminal

More information

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid

HS1L Interlock Switches with Solenoid 3000N locking strength (strongest* in class)! Suitable for large and heavy doors. Same actuators as HS1E (locking strength 3000N) can be used. Six contacts in a compact housing (same size as HS1E)! Same

More information

Section. Safety Products Selection Guide...B-2

Section. Safety Products   Selection Guide...B-2 Section B New New New Selection Guide...B-2 : Door Interlock Switches HS6B Sub-Miniature...........-5 HS5B Miniature...............-8 HS2B Full Size, Molded Plastic.-14 HS1B Full Size, Cast Aluminum..................-18

More information

HS1E Series Full Size Solenoid Locking Switches

HS1E Series Full Size Solenoid Locking Switches HS1E Series Full Size Solenoid Locking Switches AS-Interface Safety at Work Barriers Enabling Switches Door Interlock Switches X Series E-Stops Overview HS1E features: Basic unit and solenoid unit in one

More information

Door Interlock Switches

Door Interlock Switches HSE Series HSE Series Full Size Locking Switches Overview X Series E-Stops HSE features: Basic unit and solenoid unit in one housing Plastic Housing: Light weight Ease of Wiring: All the terminal screws

More information

Door Interlock Switches

Door Interlock Switches HS5B Series HS5B Series Miniature Interlock Switch HS5B features: mm x mm x 9mm Compact Housing Available with Contact Confi gurations (NO + NC or NC) Flexible Installation: By turning the head of the

More information

HS1C Series Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid. GS-ET-15 BG standard in Germany. HS1C Series Functionality

HS1C Series Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid. GS-ET-15 BG standard in Germany. HS1C Series Functionality Full Size Interlock Switch with Locking Solenoid HSC Key features include: Rugged Aluminum Die-cast Housing With the actuator mounted on a movable door, and the switch on a machine, the door can be mechanically

More information

Standard Interlock Safety Switches

Standard Interlock Safety Switches Subminiature Only 78 x 30 x 1m Two actuator entrances provide flexibility for installation options Integrated molded cable reduces wiring time IP67 (IEC60529) Direct Opening Action Actuators comply with

More information

HS6B Subminiature Interlock Switches

HS6B Subminiature Interlock Switches World-class compactness with three poles of contacts. World s smallest switch: 30 30 78 mm Dual contacts and monitor contacts achieve the highest safety category (ISO 13849-1, EN 954-1) Two actuator entry

More information

HS1B Series Full Size Interlock Switch. GS-ET-15 BG standard in Germany. Part Number Key

HS1B Series Full Size Interlock Switch. GS-ET-15 BG standard in Germany. Part Number Key HSB Series Full Size Interlock Switch HSB features: Rugged aluminum die-cast housing Direct Opening Action: If the door is forced open, the contacts are disconnected even if they are welded or stuck Available

More information

HS6B Series Sub-Miniature Interlock Switch. Direct Opening

HS6B Series Sub-Miniature Interlock Switch. Direct Opening HS6 Series HS6 Series Sub-Miniature Interlock Switch HS6 Key features include: Only 30mm x 15mm x 78mm Allows highest level of safety by having 3 contacts: dual load contacts + monitoring contact (ISO13849-1,

More information

HS1B R - R. Door Interlock Switches. HS1B Series. HS1B Series Full Size Interlock Switch. Part Number. HS1B features: Part Number Key.

HS1B R - R. Door Interlock Switches. HS1B Series. HS1B Series Full Size Interlock Switch. Part Number. HS1B features: Part Number Key. HSB Series HSB Series Full Size Interlock Switch HSB features: Body Rugged aluminum die-cast housing Direct Opening Action: If the door is forced open, the contacts are disconnected even if they are welded

More information

HS1E Interlock Swithes with Solenoid

HS1E Interlock Swithes with Solenoid HSE Interlock Swithes with Solenoid Lightweight interlock switch in plastic housing, providing high locking strength Basic unit and solenoid unit in one housing Lightweight plastic housing All terminal

More information

HS2B N B - R. Door Interlock Switches. HS2B Series. Full Size Interlock Switch. Part Number. HS2B features: Part Number Key.

HS2B N B - R. Door Interlock Switches. HS2B Series. Full Size Interlock Switch. Part Number. HS2B features: Part Number Key. HSB Series HSB Series Full Size Interlock Switch HSB features: Body Direct Opening Action: If the door is forced open, the contacts are disconnected even if they are welded or stuck Available with or without

More information

Head Removal Detection Function for Safer Performance

Head Removal Detection Function for Safer Performance HS5D Miniature Interlock Switches Head Removal Detection Function for Safer Performance (00405) New Generation Miniature Interlock Switches IDEC s new unique Head Removal Detection Function is a new generation

More information

Solenoid Locking Safety Switches

Solenoid Locking Safety Switches HSC HSC Full Size Solenoid Locking Switches Key features: Rugged aluminum die-cast housing 00N locking retention force Flexible Installation: The actuator can be accessed from two directions Select from

More information

Solenoid Locking Safety Switches

Solenoid Locking Safety Switches Locking Safety Switches HSE HSE Full Size Locking Switches Key features: Plastic Housing: Lightweight 00N locking retention force Available with a red or green indicator Choose from circuit configurations

More information

NO NO NO. Standard Interlock Safety Switches HS6B. HS5E-K Key Locking Safety Interlock Switches

NO NO NO. Standard Interlock Safety Switches HS6B. HS5E-K Key Locking Safety Interlock Switches Standard Interlock Safety Switches HS6B HS5E-K Key Locking Safety Key features: Head removal detection circuitry. High-security pin tumbler key types are used. Sixteen types of key numbers are available,

More information

Safety device new products line up. Introducing a safety door switch with solenoid interlock that is among the world s thinnest*

Safety device new products line up. Introducing a safety door switch with solenoid interlock that is among the world s thinnest* Safety device new products line up Introducing a safety door switch with solenoid interlock that is among the world s thinnest* Safety is assured during maintenance! 2013.06 panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global

More information

Application Support. Product Information. Omron STI. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from

Application Support. Product Information. Omron STI. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from Omron STI Application Support Thank you for your interest in Omron STI products. Please contact Omron STI with your application questions. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from 4:00

More information

Think Automation and beyond... IDEC Safety Interlock Switches

Think Automation and beyond... IDEC Safety Interlock Switches Think Automation and beyond... IDEC Safety Interlock Switches This document provided by Barr-Thorp Electric Co., Inc. 800-7-9 IDEC Safety Components Providing reliable, human-machine safety components

More information

D4BL. Protective Doors Are Locked Until Machines Completely Stop Operating. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure.

D4BL. Protective Doors Are Locked Until Machines Completely Stop Operating. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Protective Doors Are Locked Until Machines Completely Stop Operating A mechanical lock is applied automatically when the Operation Key is inserted. A high level of safety

More information

D4DL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Ordering Information. Model Number Legend Switches D4DL- -

D4DL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Ordering Information. Model Number Legend Switches D4DL- - Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Polymer housing, IP65, and slow-action contacts with positive opening. 2 versions Mechanical lock/solenoid release Solenoid lock/mechanical release Rotatable operating head

More information

Cable length. 3: 3 m. 4: Adjustable mounting (vertical) 4: 3NC (slow action) 5: 5 m. (Slow-action) Horizontal 1 m D4GS-N1R D4GS-N2R D4GS-N3R D4GS-N4R

Cable length. 3: 3 m. 4: Adjustable mounting (vertical) 4: 3NC (slow action) 5: 5 m. (Slow-action) Horizontal 1 m D4GS-N1R D4GS-N2R D4GS-N3R D4GS-N4R Slim Safety-Door Switch Industry s Smallest Safety-Door Switch (with 3 Contacts) for Use in Space-Confined Areas Slim body design (85 x 30 x 17 mm) suitable for small door applications 2-contact and 3-contact

More information

HS7A-DMC Non-contact Interlock Switches

HS7A-DMC Non-contact Interlock Switches Non-contact Interlock es Compact size and easy positioning. Combination with proprietary relay modules achieves safety category 4 (EN954-1). Compact size (7 16 51mm) Positioning for installation is easy.

More information

ct O en n Tr ve Solenoid Indicator (1) TÜV rating AC V, 3A 3 Mounting Examples

ct O en n Tr ve Solenoid Indicator (1) TÜV rating AC V, 3A 3 Mounting Examples Di ct O en n Tr ve m minim m Type Circuit Diagram No. [blank] : NC+NC NO/NO [] : NC+NC NO : NC+NC NC+NC [] : NC NC NC * Type Nos. in [ ] are not supplied as standard. Contact IDEC if required. HSC-KR-G-

More information

D4DL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure

D4DL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Two new types added to series: Mechanical-lock models that lock automatically when the Operation Key is inserted, and solenoid-lock models that lock when voltage is applied

More information

XA Series Emergency Stop Switches (w/removable Contact Block)

XA Series Emergency Stop Switches (w/removable Contact Block) XA ø6 XA Series Emergency Stop Switches (w/removable Contact Block) The World s First ø6 mm, 4-contact Emergency Stop Switch. Compact size - only 7.9 mm deep behind the panel. Reliable Safe break action.

More information

2NC (slow-action) Direct. Model. opening

2NC (slow-action) Direct. Model. opening Small Safety Limit Switch CSM DS_E_3_1 Smallest Class of Safety Limit Switches in the World Note: Contact your sales representative for details on models with safety standard certification. The world's

More information

For full product information, visit Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page.

For full product information, visit  Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page. Courtesy of CMA/Flodyne/Hydradyne Motion Control Hydraulic Pneumatic Electrical Mechanical (00) 6-0 www.cmafh.com Safety Interlock Switches DSL-N Super Small Class 6-Contact uard Lock Safety-Door Switch

More information

D4GS-N CSM_D4GS-N_DS_E_7_2

D4GS-N CSM_D4GS-N_DS_E_7_2 Slim Safety Door Switch D4GS-N CSM_D4GS-N_DS_E_7_2 Slim Safety Door Switches with IP67 Rating Slim design with a width of only 17 mm (three-contact models). Reversible design allowing either front or rear

More information

PS5R-S. Switching Power Supplies

PS5R-S. Switching Power Supplies TREICHL-ATM Electronic Auf der Bült 1-12 D 41189 Mönchengladbach Tel. 2166 8545 Fax 2166 8547 email: atm@treichl.de internet: www.atm-treichl.de PS5R-S Switching Power Supplies Class Create More Space

More information

Safety Limit Switch

Safety Limit Switch Safety Limit Switch D4B-@N CSM_D4B-_N_DS_E_5_1 Snap-action contact with certified direct operation certification. Maintenance, seal, and resistance to shock increased and direct mechanism added. Three-conduit

More information

Safety Control HR1S-AC. Safety Relay HR1S-AC

Safety Control HR1S-AC. Safety Relay HR1S-AC HRS-AC Safety Relay HRS-AC Key features: NC or 2NC safety input type, such as E-Stops or Interlock Switches EN ISO 3849- PLe, Safety Cat 3 compliant, and EN 6206 SIL 3 Fault diagnosis function with dual

More information

D4SL. Safety Interlock Switches. Compact 6-Contact Guard Lock Safety-Door Switch NEW! Specifications. Standards and EC Directives

D4SL. Safety Interlock Switches. Compact 6-Contact Guard Lock Safety-Door Switch NEW! Specifications. Standards and EC Directives Safety Interlock Switches DSL Compact -Contact uard Lock Safety-Door Switch Two types are available: a connector type that reduces wiring time and a detachable terminal block type. Robust and durable metal

More information

For full product information, visit Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page.

For full product information, visit  Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page. Safety Interlock Switches D4S-N D4SN For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page. Slim Safety Door Switches with

More information

D4DL. Ordering Information. Compact Guard-locking Interlock Safety Door Switch. Model Number Legend Switches D4DL- -

D4DL. Ordering Information. Compact Guard-locking Interlock Safety Door Switch. Model Number Legend Switches D4DL- - Compact Guard-locking Interlock Safety Door Switch Polymer housing, IP65, and slow-action contacts with positive opening. 2 versions Mechanical lock/solenoid release Solenoid lock/mechanical release Rotatable

More information

XW Series Emergency Stop Switches

XW Series Emergency Stop Switches ø ø mm, 4-contact Emergency Stop Switch. Compact size only 37. mm deep behind the panel (screw terminal type 4 mm with terminal cover). eliable Safe break action. The depth behind the panel is only 37.

More information

Hinged Safety Door Switch

Hinged Safety Door Switch Hinged Safety Door Switch Polymer housing, IP65, and slow-action contacts with positive opening. Two actuator types are available: Shaft Arm lever Arm lever type can be adjusted to allow a right (180 ),

More information

RU Series Universal Relays

RU Series Universal Relays Full featured universal miniature relays Designed with environment taken into consideration Two terminal styles: plug-in and PCB mount Non-polarized LED indicator available on plug-in relays No internal

More information

Door Handle Gate System

Door Handle Gate System Door Handle Actuator Key features: Easy and secure operation Rattling doors can be locked smoothly and securely. A door can be locked with an actuator by pushing and turning the handle. Padlock tab is

More information

D4DS. Safety-Door Switch. Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors. H Conforms to EN (TÜV) standards.

D4DS. Safety-Door Switch. Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors. H Conforms to EN (TÜV) standards. Safety-Door Switch Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors H Conforms to EN (TÜV) standards. (positive opening mechanism isindicatedonthe switch) H Wide standard operating

More information

Door Handle Gate System

Door Handle Gate System Door Handle Actuator Overview XW Series E-Stops Key features: Easy and secure operation Rattling doors can be locked smoothly and securely. A door can be locked with an actuator by pushing and turning

More information

2NC (slow-action) Direct. Model. opening

2NC (slow-action) Direct. Model. opening Small Safety Limit Switch D4F CSM_D4F_DS_E_5_2 Smallest Class of Safety Limit Switches in the World Note: Contact your sales representative for details on models with safety standard certification. The

More information

XW Series E-Stops. Safety. ø22mm XW E-Stops Phone: Fax: Web: -

XW Series E-Stops. Safety. ø22mm XW E-Stops Phone: Fax: Web:  - Safety ø22mm XW E-Stops... 277 XW Series E-Stops Overview Interlock Switches Enabling Switches Safety Control ight Curtains AS-Interface Safety at Work Phone: 8.894.412 - Fax: 888.723.4773 - Web: www.clrwtr.com

More information

Enabling Switches Grip Style Enabling Switches

Enabling Switches Grip Style Enabling Switches Enabling es Grip Style Enabling es What is an enabling switch? Because operators use teach pendants in hazard ous environments performing teaching, system changeover, and maintenance of robots, they must

More information

D4JL/D4JL-SK40 CSM_D4JL_D4JL-SK40_DS_E_10_2

D4JL/D4JL-SK40 CSM_D4JL_D4JL-SK40_DS_E_10_2 Guard Lock Safety-door Switch/Slide key D4JL/D4JL-SK40 CSM_D4JL_D4JL-SK40_DS_E_10_2 Holding Force of 3,000 N Two safety circuits and two monitor contacts provide an array of monitoring patterns. Standard

More information

Manual Reset Limit Switch

Manual Reset Limit Switch Manual Reset Limit Switch A Series of Pull-reset Models Available Ideal for elevators (EN81), escalators (EN115), and conveyors. Positive opening mechanism insulation approved by TÜV and BIA. and double

More information

Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism

Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism LJA Series Positive opening mechanism Snap action limit switches with positive opening mechanism enables general industrial machines to comply with EC directives

More information

D4BS. Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure. Switch D4BS - S Operation Key D4BS - K. Ordering Information

D4BS. Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure. Switch D4BS - S Operation Key D4BS - K. Ordering Information Safety-door Switch Safety-door Switch s Special Operation Key Directly Pulls Apart the Contacts from Each Other and Contributes to the Safety of the Production Site Conforms to EN (TÜV) standards corresponding

More information

XW Series E-Stops. Safety. Selection Guide ø22mm XW E-Stops

XW Series E-Stops. Safety.  Selection Guide ø22mm XW E-Stops Safety Selection Guide... 288 ø22mm XW E-Stops... 289 www.idec.com/usa/estop XW Series E-Stops Overview Interlock Switches Enabling Switches Safety Control ight Curtains AS-Interface Safety at Work Table

More information

D4DS. Compact Interlock Safety Door Switch. Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors. Refer to Precautions on page 9.

D4DS. Compact Interlock Safety Door Switch. Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors. Refer to Precautions on page 9. Compact Interlock Safety Door Switch Compact Safety Switch Saves Space and is Ideal for a Variety of Doors Positive opening mechanism and double insulation approved by TÜV and BIA. Five-direction Operation

More information

ø8 A8 Series Miniature Control Units

ø8 A8 Series Miniature Control Units A8 ø8 A8 Series Miniature Control Short 22-mm-long body miniature control unit series with LED illumination face and snap-action switching. Bright and clear LED illumination. All series have terminals

More information

D4JL/D4JL-SK40. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch/Slide key

D4JL/D4JL-SK40. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch/Slide key Guard Lock Safety-door Switch/Slide key D4JL/D4JL-SK40 C38I-E-02 Holding Force of 3,000 N Two safety circuits and two monitor contacts provide an array of monitoring patterns. Standard gold-clad contacts

More information

D4GL. Model Number Structure. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Legend. Switch. Operation Key

D4GL. Model Number Structure. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Legend. Switch. Operation Key Guard Lock Safety-door Switch D4GL Vertically Mounting Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Ideal for Limited Installation Space Selectable Operation Key insertion direction. Slim safety-door switch with an electromagnetic

More information

Safety-door Switch D4NS. Model Number Structure. Model Number Legend

Safety-door Switch D4NS. Model Number Structure. Model Number Legend Safety-door Switch D4NS Multi-contact, Labor-saving, Environmentfriendly, Next-generation Safety-door Switch Lineup includes MBB models and three contact models with 2NC/1NC and 3NC contact forms in addition

More information

Safety-door Switch. Ordering Information

Safety-door Switch. Ordering Information Safety-door Switch Safety-door Switch s Special Operation Key Positively Pulls Apart the Contacts from Each Other and Contributes to the Safety of the Production Site Special Operation Key prevents mis-operation.

More information

D4GL. Environment-friendly Switch with Direct Opening Contacts. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure

D4GL. Environment-friendly Switch with Direct Opening Contacts. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Environment-friendly Switch with Direct Opening Contacts Contains no harmful substances, such as lead or cadmium, reducing the burden on the environment. Slim safety-door

More information

For full product information, visit Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page.

For full product information, visit  Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page. Safety Interlock Switches D4JL D4JL For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSpec Code or scan the QR Code for quick access to the specific web page. uard Lock Safety-Door Switch Holding

More information

Emergency Stop Switches Selection Guide

Emergency Stop Switches Selection Guide Selection Guide New Concept Reverse Energy Structure Safe Break Action ø9mm Button E-BV3 (Solder, PC Board Terminal) Model Mark Page D-8 ø6m Mount Hole Non illuminated Detachable Block Pushlock Pull or

More information

LJASeries. Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism

LJASeries. Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism Limit Switches with Positive Opening Mechanism LJASeries Snap action limit switches with positive opening mechanism enables general industrial machines to comply with EC directives and to acquire CE marking.

More information

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data

AF40... AF96 3-pole contactors Technical data Main pole - Utilization characteristics according to IEC Standards IEC 60947- / 60947-4- and EN 60947- / 60947-4- Rated operational voltage Ue max. 690 V Rated frequency (without derating) 50 / 60 Hz Conventional

More information

22mm XW E-Stops. UL File #E68961 CCC No Specifications

22mm XW E-Stops. UL File #E68961 CCC No Specifications XW Series 22mm XW E-Stops Key features: The depth behind the panel is only 48.7 mm for 1 to 4 contacts (with terminal cover) for illuminated and non-illuminated units. IDEC s original Safe break action

More information

Switches & Pilot Devices

Switches & Pilot Devices Key features: Two button sizes: ø29 and ø4mm ead-free, ohs compliant, (EU directive 22/95/EC) Depth behind the panel: Standard - only 27.9mm for 1 to 4 contacts Unibody - only 23.9mm for 1NC or 2NC IDEC

More information

Small Limit Switch D4V

Small Limit Switch D4V Small Limit Switch DV Compact Vertical Models Sized for Asian Standards Compact new design approximately / the size of OMRON vertical Limit Switches. Structure enables the terminal section to be fully

More information

2 Specifications and Ratings. Applicable Standards. Operating Condition. Thermal Current Ith 10A Contact Ratings. Operating Speed

2 Specifications and Ratings. Applicable Standards. Operating Condition. Thermal Current Ith 10A Contact Ratings. Operating Speed INSTRUCTION SHEET HS1L Series Solenoid Type B19071(0) 2 Specifications and Ratings Thank you for purchasing this IDEC product. Confirm that the delivered product is what you have ordered. Read this instruction

More information

D4BL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Die-cast aluminum body Key holding force of 700 N. Model Number Structure. Model Number Legend Switch D4BL - K

D4BL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch. Die-cast aluminum body Key holding force of 700 N. Model Number Structure. Model Number Legend Switch D4BL - K Guard Lock Safety-door Switch D4BL CSM_D4BL_DS_E_10_1 Die-cast aluminum body Key holding force of 700 N Auxiliary release key ensures easy maintenance and unlocks the door in the case of a power failure.

More information

ø10 A1 Series Miniature Control Units

ø10 A1 Series Miniature Control Units A1 ø10 A1 Series Miniature Control Short 22-mm-long body miniature control unit series with LED illumination face and snap-action switching. Bright and clear LED illumination. All series have terminals

More information

D4BL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch

D4BL. Guard Lock Safety-door Switch Guard Lock Safety-door Switch D4BL CSM_D4BL_DS_E_5_1 Release Protective Cover Locks Using Controller Signals or Pushbutton Switches after the Cutting Tool Stops Moving Due to Inertia A mechanical lock

More information

D4NH. Model Number Structure. Safety-door Hinge Switch. Model Number Legend

D4NH. Model Number Structure. Safety-door Hinge Switch. Model Number Legend Safety-door Hinge Switch Compact, Plastic-body Safety-door Hinge Switch Designed for Saving Space in Machines and Other Equipment Lineup includes three contact models with 2NC/1NO and 3NC contact forms

More information

ø12 A2 Series Miniature Control Units

ø12 A2 Series Miniature Control Units ø2 A2 Series Miniature Control Short 22-mm-long body miniature control unit series with bright LED illumination face and snap-action switching. Degree of protection: IP40 and IP5 (IEC 0529) All series

More information

Application Support. Product Information. Omron STI. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from

Application Support. Product Information. Omron STI. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from Omron STI Application Support Thank you for your interest in Omron STI products. Please contact Omron STI with your application questions. Support Engineers are available at our USA headquarters from 4:00

More information

Machine & Process Safeguarding Solution Selection Guide

Machine & Process Safeguarding Solution Selection Guide Machine & Process Safeguarding Solution Selection Guide 2015-2016»» Expert Area»» Light Curtains»» Laser Scanners»» Programmable Safety Systems»» Mats and Edges»» Door Switches»» Emergency Stop Devices»»

More information

D4DL. Locking Safety-Door Switch. Compact, Locking Safety Door Switch with Dual Key Entry. H Two types in the series: Mechanical-lock

D4DL. Locking Safety-Door Switch. Compact, Locking Safety Door Switch with Dual Key Entry. H Two types in the series: Mechanical-lock Locking Safety-Door Switch Compact, Locking Safety Door Switch with Dual Key Entry H Two types in the series: Mechanical-lock models that lock automatically when the Operation Key is inserted, and solenoid-lock

More information

D4NH. Safety-door Hinge Switch. Compact, Plastic-body Safety-door Hinge Switch Designed for Saving Space in Machines and Other Equipment

D4NH. Safety-door Hinge Switch. Compact, Plastic-body Safety-door Hinge Switch Designed for Saving Space in Machines and Other Equipment Safety-door Hinge Switch CSM DS_E_4_1 Compact, Plastic-body Safety-door Hinge Switch Designed for Saving Space in Machines and Other Equipment Note: Contact your sales representative for details on models

More information

22mm XW E-Stops. IEC , EN , JIS C , UL508, UL991, NFPA79, CSA C22.2 No. 14, GB

22mm XW E-Stops. IEC , EN , JIS C , UL508, UL991, NFPA79, CSA C22.2 No. 14, GB ø22mm XW E-Stops Circuit Breakers Terminal Blocks ors Timers elays & Sockets Signaling ights 22mm XW E-Stops Key features: The depth behind the panel can be as little as 46.4 mm for 1 to 4 contacts (with

More information